Staff Report - Agreement Ballroom B HVAC and Lighting Systems Project (M17101900) [Published for 10-Day Review on 2232023] — Sacramento City Council, March 7, 2023 (part 2 of 2)

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1 (Flat): Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2 (Velvet): Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4 (Satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5 (Semigloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7 (High Gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

H. Areas Subject to Moisture and Food Preparation: These spaces are those that have permanent plumbing connections and appliances. These include, but are not limited to, toilet rooms connected to shower areas, janitor’s closets, locker rooms connected to shower areas, shower rooms and areas, steam rooms, training rooms, first aid rooms, concession stands, commissaries, kitchens, and laundries. These areas require epoxy painting systems.

1. Toilet rooms consisting of toilets and sinks are not included in this definition.

2. Exam rooms, training rooms and other care giving rooms containing handwashing sinks are not included in this definition unless noted otherwise on the Finish Schedule.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS
© Populous 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 2

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become pa rt of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

B. EPA VOC Regulations: All products supplied under this specification section for the locations listed below must be compliant with the VOC limits set in the following districts.

1. OTC Statutes: Maine, New Hampshire, Massachusetts, Connecticut, Rhode Island, New York, Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, Maryland, Ohio, Illinois, Virginia: the counties of Arlington, Fairfax, Prince William, Stafford and Loudoun.

2. CARB SCM: California except California South Coast.

3. SCAQMD rule 1113: California South Coast counties largely comprising the Los Angeles metropolitan area.

4. LADCO: Illinois, Indiana, and Ohio.

5. All other states follow USEPA AIM VOC rules and as otherwise indicated.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.

2. PPG Paints

3. Sherwin Williams

4. Tnemec, Inc.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS
© Populous 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 3

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.

2.3 PAINT, PRODUCTS
A. See Interior Painting Schedule for full coating instructions based on substrate.

B. Primer: Provide at all new wall construction as indicated in Interior Painting Schedule at the end of this Section.

1. Gypsum Substrates: Primers to be compatible with substrate and topcoat. a. Benjamin Moore, Ultra Spec 500 Interior Primer.
b. PPG Paints, SpeedHide zero VOC interior latex primer. c. S-W, ProMar 200 zero VOC interior latex primer.

C. Acrylic Latex

1. Benjamin Moore, Ultra Spec 500.

2. PPG Paints, Speedhide zero VOC.

3. Sherwin Williams, ProMar 200 zero VOC.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.

Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Wood: 15 percent.

2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS
© Populous 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 4
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth and complies with the Level standard specified.

D. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.

E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

E. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. Exercise care to avoid raising nap of paper.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the Finish Schedule indicates that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the schedule does not indicate color or finish, match adjacent materials or surfaces.

3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

4. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS
© Populous 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 5
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, an d Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation coverin g or other paintable jacket material.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
h. Other items as directed by Architect.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.

E. Stencil Painted Signs: Apply stencil painted signs on both sides of all fire rated partitions.

Locate bottom of the signs no more than 12 inches above removable ceilings. Repeat application of stencil at maximum horizontal spacing of 12 feet and at every intersecting room partition.

1. Use stencils with all capital letters that are 3” high. Color of sign letters is to be bright red.

Font for stencils to be a sans serif font similar to Arial or Helvetica.

2. Provide stencil painted signs with the following messages corresponding to the new walls. See Life Safety plans for wall ratings.
a. “1 HOUR RATED WALL”
b. “2 HOUR RATED WALL”
c. “3 HOUR RATED WALL”
d. “1 HOUR RATED WALL AND SMOKE BARRIER”
e. “2 HOUR RATED WALL AND SMOKE BARRIER”

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS
© Populous 2021 INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 6

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

C. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated; unless noted otherwise in the Construction Documents.

1. Pipe and Equipment Identification Schedule:
a. Painting: Paint entire surface of pipe for mechanical and electrical services in accordance with schedule provided on mechanical and electrical drawings and/or contained in mechanical and electrical specifications.

B. Wood Substrates; Opaque Finish: Latex system.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Ceilings: Not less than 2.5 mills dry, zero VOC latex flat over zero VOC interior latex primer.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR MEP/F/T SYSTEMS
20 05 48-1
SECTION 20 05 48 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR MEP/F/T SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section includes requirements for seismic controls to be installed for project, the design for which is a delegated design responsibility.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Section Title: Seismic C ontrols for Mechanical, Electrical Plumbing, F ire Protection , and Technology (MEP/F/T) Systems.

B. IBC: International Building Code.

C. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. The contractor shall be responsible for determining the requirements for seismic control measures to be applied to HVAC piping and equipment, electrical conduit and raceways specified herein.

Seismic protection criteria used to determine seismic control requirements of all mechanical and electrical systems shall be determined by the applicable code adopted in the project jurisdiction.

1. B. Where required, the Contractor shall be responsible for determining the type and location of seismic supports required for the HVAC piping and equipment, electrical condu it and raceways and plumbing elements shown on the contract drawings based on the seismic criteria, the size and weight of the supported element and the distance from structure that the element will be installed. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings as defined in Paragraph “Submittals” showing the types and locations of required seismic supports.

C. The requirements for seismic control measures to be applied to HVAC piping and equipment, electrical conduit and raceways specified herein are in addition to any other items called for in other sections of these specifications. All anchor connections to structure for support of mechanical/electrical equipment, regardless of the need for seismic restraints, shall be shown on shop drawings and submitted for review by the Engineer of Record.

D. At the Contractor’s option, use pre-engineered seismic restraints produced by the manufacturers specified in part 2.1 of this section. Spacing of seismic restraints m ay be modified in these pre -

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR MEP/F/T SYSTEMS
20 05 48-2
engineered systems to meet seismic design parameters when properly engineered and documented.

E. All seismic restraints, isolators, and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer.

F. Seismic protection systems shall be installed in strict accordance with all applicable local, state, and/or federal codes. Installation shall also be in strict accordance with component manufacturer’s requirements and standards and with industry construction standards. Whenever conflicts occur between codes or standards, the most stringent shall apply.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Control Measure Analysis: The contractor shall provide an analysis determining the requirement or exemption for seismic control measures for mechanical and electrical equipment.

The analysis shall be signed and sealed by a licensed professional structural engineer.

1. The analysis shall at a minimum include the following:
a. For projects permitted under International Building Code 1) Seismic Use Group or Building Category.
2) Seismic Design Category
3) Site Class
4) Design Spectral Response Acceleration Values
B. Where seismic control measure analysis determines seismic controls are not required:

1. Submit report that summarizes the analysis for review and approval.

2. Disregard the remaining portions of this submittal section C. Where seismic control measure analysis determines seismic controls are required:

1. Submit report that summarizes the analysis for review and approval

2. Provide submittals for seismic bracing as required in the remaining portions of this submittal section.

D. Product Data: The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for products as follows:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: Submit seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and des ign criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select seismic restraints.

2. Indicate materials an d dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices.

3. Seismic Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: Submit report that supports selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR MEP/F/T SYSTEMS
20 05 48-3
spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indica te directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: Where required provide preapproval documentation from an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
F. Shop Drawings: The following items shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer:

1. Shop drawings along with catalog cuts, templates, erection, and installation details, as appropriate, for the items listed below shall be submitted for approval. Submittals shall be complete in detail; shall indicate thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions; and shall show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to other building systems and construction.
a. Sway Braces
b. Flexible Couplings or Joints
c. Equipment Anchor Connections
d. Details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. e. Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacturers' submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points.
f. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size and locations for each piece of equipment.

2. Layout drawings showing locations and types of seismic restraints for all equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit shall be submitted. Locations for seismic restraints shall be coordinated with the structure and with other mechanical and electrical components.

Coordinate types of restraints with the submitted schedule.

3. Indicate components exempt from seismic due to exceptions for component importance factor, component response modification factor, component amplif ication factor, seismic design category, etc.

G. Seismic Certification and Analysis:

1. Seismic restraint calculations shall be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations shall be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the project location.

2. All restraining devices shall have a preapproval number from California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Preapprovals based on independent testing are preferred to preapprovals based on calculations. Where preapproved devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Testing and calculations shall include shear and tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 45° to the weakest mode.

3. Analysis shall indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the code required forces acting through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level.

4. Submit certification letter stating that the special inspector has received the factory training necessary to perform the field inspection specified in Part 3 of this specification.

H. Welding certificates.

A. Professional Engineer Qualifications (Analysis): The professional engineer shall be licensed to practice in the jurisdiction where the project is located and shall be experienced in providing

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR MEP/F/T SYSTEMS
20 05 48-4
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for building structural and seismic requirements.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications (Design): The professional engineer shall be legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction wher e the Project is located and shall be experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraints that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Seismic Restraint Manual: A seismic restraint manual shall be prepared that contains the basis of the design for the seismic support systems, product data, shop drawings and layout drawings.

A copy of the seismic restraint manual shall be kept on the jobsite for the duration of the project.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
F. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic - restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic- restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 SPECIAL INSPECTION
A. Requirements specified herein for special inspection of important aspects of the seismic design are in addition to other requirements specified in other sections of this specification.

1.7 HVAC EQUIPMENT
A. HVAC equipment to be protected shall include the following items to the extent required on the drawings or in other sections of these specifications:

1. Mechanical Equipment including but not limited to:
a. Air terminal Units

2. HVAC (hydronic) Piping Systems

3. HVAC Ductwork Systems

1.8 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Electrical equipment to be protected shall include the following items to the extent required on the drawings or in other sections of these specifications:

1. Electrical Conduit and Raceways

1.9 RELATED WORK
A. Supplementary Support Steel

1. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., as required or specified.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR MEP/F/T SYSTEMS
20 05 48-5

1.10 ATTACHMENTS
A. Contractor shall supply restraint attachments, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the seismic vendor's calculations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Seismic Restraints: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following or approved equals:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. B-Line / Tolco.

3. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT).

4. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

5. Loos & Company, Inc.

6. Mason Industries, Inc.

7. Uni-Strut.

8. Vibro-Acoustics.

B. Flexible Couplings: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following or approved equals:

1. Barco Div.

2. Flexonics, Inc.

3. Hyspan.

4. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT).

5. Mason Industries, Inc.

6. Resistoflex.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Bolts and Nuts:

1. Squarehead bolts and heavy hexagon nuts, ANSI B18.2.1 and B18.2.2, and ASTM A30 7 or A 576.

B. Sway Brace: Except for pipes, material shall be structural steel conforming to ASTM A 36. Steel pipes shall conform to ASTM A 501.

C. Flexible Couplings: Flexible couplings shall have same pressure ratings as adjo ining pipe.

Where required by these specifications, flexible couplings shall be one of the following:

1. Flexible ball joints conforming to the following requirements may be employed on aboveground piping. Joints shall have cast or wrought steel casing and ball parts capable of 360-degree rotation plus not less than 15 -degree angular movement. Joints shall be certified to be suitable for the service intended by the manufacturer, based on not less than 2 years' satisfactory operation in a similar application.

2. Flexible metal hose type joints may be used for piping, up to 8" pipe diameter. Where permitted in other sections of these specifications, joints utilizing split -half couplings with grooved or shouldered pipe ends may be used.

2.3 CABLE RESTRAINT
A. Restraint assembly for suspended equipment, piping and ductwork consisting of galvanized steel aircraft cable attached to galvanized steel thim bles or steel assemblies with two clamping bolts.

Thimbles or assemblies shall be specifically designed for cable service, shall be able to swivel to final installation angle and shall be securely fastened to the equipment or equipment base and

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR MEP/F/T SYSTEMS
20 05 48-6
the building structure. Cables shall be sized for the force required per code with a minimum safety factor of 2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General

1. Install and anchor seismic-control products according to manufacturer's written instructions and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Install cables to prevent excessive seismic motion and so arranged that they do not engage during normal operation.

B. Sway Braces for Piping, Conduit and Ducts

1. Sway braces shall be ins talled on piping, conduit and HVAC ducts to preclude damage during seismic activity. Provisions of this paragraph apply to all piping within a 5 -foot line around outside of building unless buried in the ground. Piping grouped for support on trapeze-type hangers shall be braced at the same intervals as determined by the smallest diameter pipe of the group. No trapeze -type hanger shall be secured with less than two 1/2 inch bolts. Bracing rigidly attached to pipe flanges, or similar, shall not be used where is would interfere with thermal expansion of piping.

2. Sway Braces for Piping and Conduit:
a. Horizontal Runs: Provide transverse and longitudinal sway bracing at intervals as required for the pipe size and seismic zone.
b. Vertical Runs: Vertical runs of pip ing 1-1/2” or greater diameter shall be braced at not more than 10 -foot vertical intervals. For piping smaller than 1 -1/2” diameter, bracing shall be provided at no more than 4-foot spacing. c. Anchor Rods, Angles, and Bars: Anchor rods, angles, and bars sh all be bolted to either pipe clamps or pipe flanges at one end and cast-in place concrete or masonry insert of clip angles bolted to the steel structure on the other end. Rods shall be solid metal or pipe as specified below. Anchor rods, angles, and bars shall not exceed lengths given in Table III.
d. Clamps: Clamps on uninsulated pipes shall be applied directly to pipe. Insulated piping shall have clamps applied over insulation vapor barrier with high -density inserts and metal protection shields under each clamp.
e. Bolts: Bolts used for attachment of anchors to pipe and structure shall be not less than 1/2 inch diameter.

3. Sway Braces for HVAC Ducts:
a. Transverse Sway Bracing: Transverse sway bracing shall be provided at each horizontal turn of 45 degrees or more, at the end of each duct run, and otherwise at intervals as required for duct size and seismic zone. Walls which ducts penetrate may be considered transverse braces.
b. Longitudinal Sway Bracing: Longitudinal sway bracing shall be provided at intervals as required for duct size and seismic zone. Transverse bracing for one duct section may also act as longitudinal bracing for a duct section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within 4 feet of the intersection, and it is sized for the larger duct.

C. Piping and Conduit Penetration Requirements

1. Insulated and uninsulated pipes and conduit passing through walls and partitions shall be run through not less than No. 12 gauge steel pipe sleeves finishing flush with the fini shed wall surfaces. Where covered pipes pass through the walls or partitions, same shall be centered in steel pipe sleeves. All sleeves or thimbles shall be independent of the pipes they enclose and centered in sleeves to insure free movement of the pipe s without injury

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR MEP/F/T SYSTEMS
20 05 48-7
to pipe insulation, wall or other finish. Caulk around all pipes and pipe sleeves passing through walls or ceilings with untarred jute and make airtight and soundproof.

2. Materials and equipment shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below:

D. Flexible Couplings or Joints

1. Building Piping: Flexible couplings or joints in building piping shall be provided in the following locations on pipe risers:
a. Within 24 inches of the top and bottom of all risers. This requirement may be deleted in risers less than 3 ft. in length, and in risers 3 to 7 ft. in length, one flexible coupling is adequate.

E. Equipment Sway Bracing

1. Provide for all items supported from overhead floor or roof structures with the following requirements:
a. Braces shall consist of angles, rods, bars, or pipes secured at both ends with not less than 1/2 inch bolts. Braces shall conform to all applicable codes and standards.

Bracing shall be provided in two planes of directions, 90 degrees apart, for each item of equipment. Sufficient braces shall be provided for equipment to resist a horizontal force equal to 50 percent of the weight of equipment without exceeding safe working stress of bracing components. Details of all equipment bracing shall be submitted for approval.
b. In lieu of bracing with vertical supports, these items may be supported with hangers inclined at 45 degrees directed up and radially away from equ ipment and oriented symmetrically in 90 degree intervals on the horizontal plane, bisecting the angles of each corner of the equipment, provided that supporting members are properly sized to support operating weight of equipment when hangers are included at a 45 degree angle.

F. Ceiling mounted air terminals or services installed in lay-in ceilings

1. Positively attach to the ceiling suspension main runners or to cross runners with the same carrying capacity as the main runners.

2. Terminals or services weighing no t more than 5 6 pounds, in addition to the above, shall have two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the terminal or service or to the structure above. These wires may be slack.

3. Terminals or services weighing more than 56 pounds shall be supported directly from the structure above by approved hangers.

3.2 SPECIAL INSPECTION
A. Special Inspector: Employ a factory trained representative during construction to observe the work specified and to ensure that it conforms to the Contrac t documents. Factory trained representative shall be a qualified person who shall demonstrate competence and specialized experience, to the satisfaction of the engineer of record, for inspection of the seismic protection of mechanical and electrical equipment.

B. Inspection Requirements: The factory trained representative shall periodically inspect the following systems to verify conformance with the contract documents and the local code:

1. Installation of HVAC ductwork that will contain hazardous materials in structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F.

C. Inspection Reports: Ensure that the inspection report is furnished from the special inspector to the engineer of record. At the end of the work, ensure that a final, signed report is submitted by the special inspector, stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the special inspector’s knowledge, in conformance with the Contract documents.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR MEP/F/T SYSTEMS
20 05 48-8
D. Discrepancies: Discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction, and then, if uncorrected, to the architect and engineer of record.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-1
SECTION 23 00 10 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of complete functioning systems, and each element thereof, as specified or indicated on the Drawings and Specifications or reasonably inferred; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include materials, labor, supervision, supplie s, equipment, transportation, and utilities.

1. Mechanical work includes the following:
a. Disconnect and remove existing VAV terminal units serving the existing ballroom including selective demolition of ductwork, heating water piping and controls. b. Installation of new VAV terminal units in accessible locations. c. Ductwork modifications to connec t primary air to VAV terminal units and connect distribution ductwork to existing distribution ducts and diffusers. d. Heating water piping modifications to serve new VAV terminal units. e. Controls modifications.
f. Testing and balancing.

B. Division 23 of the Specifications and Drawings numbered with prefixes M, MP or ME, or MEP generally describe these systems, but the scope of the Mechanical work includes all such work indicated in the Contract Documents: Instructions to Bidders; Proposal Form; General Conditions; Supplementary General Conditions; Architectural, Structural, Me chanical, Plumbing and Electrical Drawings and Specifications; and Addenda.

C. The Drawings have been prepared diagrammatically intended to convey the scope of work, indicating the intended general arrangement of the equipment, fixtures, ductwork, piping, etc . without showing all the exact details as to elevations, offsets, control lines, and other installation requirements. The Contractor shall use the Drawings as a guide when laying out the work and shall verify that materials and equipment will fit into th e designated spaces, and which, when installed per manufacturers requirements, will ensure a complete, coordinated, satisfactory and properly operating system.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All work under this Division shall be executed in a thorough professional mann er by competent and experienced workmen licensed to perform the Work specified.

B. All work shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacturers ’ requirements, recommendations, and installation instructions . Equipment and materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner and shall be aligned, leveled, and adjusted for satisfactory operation.

C. Material and equipment shall be new, shall be of the best quality and design, shall be current model of the manufacturer, shall be free from defects and imperfections and shall have markings or a nameplate identifying the manufacturer and providing sufficient reference to establish quality, size and capacity. Material and equipment of the same type shall be made by the same manufacturer whenever practicable.

D. Unless specified otherwise, manufactured items shall have been installed and used, without modification, renovation, or repair for not less than one year prior to date of bidding for this project.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-2

1.3 CODES, REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. Execute Work in ac cordance with the National Fire Protection Association and all Local, State, and National codes, ordinances and regulations in force governing the particular class of Work involved. Obtain timely inspections by the constituted authorities, and upon final completion of the Work obtain and deliver to the Owner executed final certificates of acceptance from the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

B. Any conflict between these Specifications and accompanying Drawings and the applicable Local, State and Federal codes, ordinances and regulations shall be reported to the Architect in sufficient time, prior to the opening of Bids, to prepare the Supplementary Drawings and Specification Addenda required to resolve the conflict.

C. The governing codes are minimum requirements. Where these Drawings and Specifications exceed the code requirements, these Drawings and Specification shall prevail.

D. All material, manufacturing methods, handling, dimensions, method or installation and test procedure shall conform to but not be limited to the following industry standards and codes:

BOCA Building Officials Code Administration
CBSC California Building Standards Code
CEC California Energy Code
CMC California Mechanical Code
ADA American Disabilities Act
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association, Inc.

ANSI American National Standards Institute
AHRI Air Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society of Testing Materials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
HI Hydraulic Institute
MSS Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry NEC National Electrical Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NEMA National Electrical Manufactures' Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

UL Underwriter's Laboratories
E. Contractor shall comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal departments affected by connections of services.

F. All mechanical work shall be performed in compliance with applicable safety regulations, including OSHA regulations. Safety lights, guards and warning signs required for the performance of the mechanical work shall be provided by the Contractor.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. General:

1. Furnish: The term “fu rnish” is used to mean “supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations.”

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-3

2. Install: The term “install” is used to describe operations at the project site including the actual “unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.”

3. Provide: The term “provide” means “to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.”

4. Furnished by Owner or Furnished by Others: The item will be furnished by the Owner or Others. It is to be installed and connected under the requirements of this Division, complete and ready for operation, including items incidental to the Work, including ser vices necessary for proper installation and operation. The installation shall be included under the guarantee required by this Division.

5. Engineer: Where referenced in this Division, “Engineer” is the Engineer of Record and the Design Professional for t he Work under this Division, and is a Consultant to, and an authorized representative of, the Architect, as defined in the General and/or Supplementary Conditions. When used in this Division, it means increased involvement by, and obligations to, the Engineer, in addition to involvement by, and obligations to, the “Architect”.

6. AHJ: The local code and/or inspection agency (Authority) Having Jurisdiction over the Work.

7. CMATT: Certified Acceptance Mechanical Test Technician. A professional certified to perform acceptance tests and complete the documentation required for nonresidential acceptance tests as required by the California Building Energy Efficiency Standards.

Technician shall be certified by an authorized mechanical acceptance test technician certification provider.

8. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory, as defined and listed by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 (e.g., UL, ETL, CSA, etc.), and acceptable to the Authority having Jurisdiction (AHJ) over this project. Nationally Recognized Testing Labora tories and standards listed are used only to represent the characteristics required and are not intended to restrict the use of other listed Manufacturers and models that meet the specified criteria.

9. Substitution: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. Substitutions include Value Engineering proposals.
a. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project condi tions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.
b. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

10. Value Engineering: A systematic method to improve the “value” of goods and services by using an examination of function. Value, as defined, is the ratio of function to cost. Value can therefore be increased by either improving the function or reducing the cost. The goal of VE is to achieve the desired function at the lowest overall cost consistent with required performance.

B. The terms "approved equal", “equivalent”, or "equal" are used synonymously and shall mean “accepted by or acceptable to the Engineer as equivalent to the item or manufacturer specified”.

The term "approved" shall mean labeled, listed, or both, by an NRTL, and acceptable to the AHJ over this project.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall visit the site and ascertain the conditions to be encountered while installing the Work under this Division, verify all dimensions and locations before purchasing equipment or commencing work, and make due provision for sam e in the bid. Failure to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for omission, alteration, incorrect or faulty

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-4
installation of Work under this Division or for additional compensation for Work covered by this Division.

1. The existing ceiling plenum is very congested with ceiling support framing throughout the center section of the ballroom. The Contractor shall make provisions to inspect the ceiling plenum prior to project bid. Duct and pipe routing shown on the dr awings is diagrammatic and the Contractor shall include allowance to make routing modifications to avo id concealed ceiling framing and other obstructions which may only become evident once the lay-in portions of the ceiling can be removed allowing full view of existing conditions.

B. The Contractor shall refer to Drawings of the other disciplines and to relevant equipment drawings and shop drawings to determine the extent of clear spaces. The Contractor shall make offsets required to clear equipment, beams an d other structural members; and to facilitate concealing piping and ductwork in the manner anticipated in the design.

C. The Contractor shall confirm and coordinate the final location and routing of all mechanical, electrical, and control systems with all architectural features, structural components, and other trades.

D. The Contractor shall maintain a foreman on the jobsite at all times to coordinate his work with other contractors and subcontractors so that various components of the mechanical systems will be installed at the proper time, will fit the available space, and will allow proper service access to the equipment. Carry on the Work in such a manner that the Work of the other contractors and trades will not be handicapped, hindered, or delayed at any time.

E. Work of this Division shall prog ress according to the "Construction Schedule" as established by the Prime Contractor and his subcontractors and as approved by the Architect. Cooperate in establishing these schedules and perform the Work under this Division, in a timely manner in conformance with the construction schedule so as to ensure successful achievement of schedule dates.

1.6 MEASUREMENTS AND LAYOUTS
A. The drawings are schematic in nature, but show the various components of the systems approximately to scale and attempt to indicate how t hey are to be integrated with other parts of the building. Figured dimensions shall be taken in preference to scale dimensions. Determine exact locations by job measurements, by checking the requirements of other trades, and by reviewing the Contract Documents. The Contractor will be held responsible for errors which could have been avoided by proper checking and inspection.

1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for submittal requirements in addition to requirements specified herein.

B. Submittals and shop drawings shall not contain the firm name, logo, seal, or signature of the Engineer. They shall not be copies of the work product of the Engineer. If the Contractor desires to use elements of such product, the license agreement for transfer of information obtained from the Engineer must be used.

D. Separate submittals according to individual specifi cation sections. Only resubmit those sections requested for resubmittal.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-5
E. Provide submittals in sufficient detail so as to demonstrate compliance with the se Contract Documents and the design concept. Highlight, mark, list or indicate the materials, perform ance criteria and accessories that are being proposed. Illegible submittals will be rejected and returned without review.

F. Refer to individual Sections for additional submittal requirements.

G. Transmit submittals as early as required to support t he project sc hedule. Allow two weeks for Engineer review time, plus to/from mailing time via the Architect, plus a duplication of this time for resubmittal if required. Transmit submittals as soon as possible after Notice to Proceed and before Mechanical construction starts.

H. Before transmitting submittals and material lists, verify that the equipment submitted is mutually compatible with and suitable for the intended use. Verify that the equipment will fit the available space and maintain manufacturer recommended ser vice clearances. If the size of equipment furnished makes necessary any change in location, or configuration, submit a shop drawing showing the proposed layout.

I. Submittals shall contain the following information:

1. The project name.

2. The applicable specification section and paragraph.

3. Equipment identification acronym as used on the drawings.

4. The submittal date.

5. The Contractor's stamp, which shall certify that the stamped drawings have been checked by the Contractor, comply with the Drawings and Specifications , and have been coordinated with other trades.

6. Submittals not so identified will be returned to the Contractor without action.

J. Refer to Division 01 for acceptance of electronic submittals for this project. For electronic submittals, Contractor shall submit the documents in accordance with this Section and the procedures specified in Division 01. Contractor shall notify the Archi tect and Engineer that the submittals have been posted. If electronic submittal procedures are not defined in Division 01, Contractor shall include the website, user name and password information needed to access the submittals. For submittals sent by e -mail, Contractor shall copy the Architect and Engineer’s designated representatives. Contractor shall allow for the Engineer review time as specified above in the construction schedule. Contractor shall submit only the documents required to purchase the materials and/or equipment in the submittal.

K. The checking and subsequent acceptance by the Engineer and/or Architect of submittals shall not relieve responsibility from the Contractor for (1) deviations from Drawings and Specifications; (2) errors in dimensions, details, sizes of equipment, or quantities; (3) omissions of components or fittings; and (4) not coordinating items with actual building conditions and adjacent work.

Contractor shall request and secure written acceptance from the Engineer and Archit ect prior to implementing any deviation.

L. Provide welders’ qualification certificates.

1.8 ELECTRONIC DRAWING FILES
A. In preparation of shop drawings or record drawings, Contractor may, at their option, obtain electronic drawing files in AutoCAD or DXF format from the Engineer for a shipping and handling fee of $200 for a drawing set up to 12 sheets and $15 per sheet for each additional sheet. Contact the Architect for Architect’s written authorization. Contractor shall request and complete the Electronic File Release Agreement form from the Engineer. Send the form along with a check made payable to Henderson Engineers, Inc. Contractor shall indicate the desired shipping method and drawing format on the attached form. In addition to payment, Architect’s written authorization and Engineer’s release agreement form must be received before electronic drawing files will be sent.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-6

1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for Substitutions in addition to requirements specified herein.

B. Materials, products , equipment, and systems described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by the proposed substitution.

C. The base bid shall include only the products from manufactur ers specifically named in the drawings and specifications.

D. Request for Substitution:

1. Complete and send the Substitution Request Form attached at the end of this section for each material, product, equipment, or system that is proposed to be substituted.

2. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer.

3. Unless stated otherwise in writing to the Engineer by the Contractor, Contractor warrants to the Engineer, Architect, and Owner the following:
a. Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to meet or exceed the specified Work in all respects.
b. Proposed substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results, including functional clear ances, maintenance service, and sourcing of replacement parts.
c. Proposed substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
d. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified Work. e. If accepted substitution fail s to perform as required, Contrac tor shall replace substitute material or system with that originally specified and bear costs incurred thereby.
f. Coordination, installation and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects.

E. Substitution Consideration:

1. No substitutions will be considered unless the Substitution Request Form is completed and attached with the appropriate substitution documentation.

2. No substitution s will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval to bid has been received by the Engineer at least ten (10) calendar days prior to the date for receipt of Bids.

3. If the proposed substitution is approved prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be stated in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. Verbal approval will not be given.

4. No substitutions will be considered after the Contract is awarded unless specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for Operation and Maintenance Manuals in addition to requirements specified herein.

B. Submit manuals prior to requesting the final punch list and before all request s for Substantial Completion.

C. Instruct the Owner's permanent personnel in the proper operation of, startup and shutdown procedures and maintenance of the equipment and components of the systems installed under this Division.

D. Each manual shall contain data listed in each individual Section.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-7
E. Refer to Division 01 for acceptance of electronic manuals for this project. For electronic manuals, Contractor shall submit the documents in accordance with this Section and the procedures specified in Division 01. Contractor shall notify the Architect and Engineer that the manuals have been posted. If electronic manual procedures are not defined in Division 01, Contractor shall include the website, user name and password information needed to access the manuals. For manuals sent by e -mail, Co ntractor shall copy the Architect and Engineer’s designated representative.

1.11 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide to the Owner the spare parts specified in the individual sections in Division 23 of this specification.

1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Division 01 and Ge neral Conditions for Record Drawings in addition to requirements specified herein.

B. A set of work prints of the Contract Documents shall be kept on the jobsite during construction for the purpose of noting changes. During the course of construction, the Co ntractor shall indicate on these Documents changes made from the original Contract Documents. Particular attention shall be paid to those items which need to be located for servicing. Underground utilities shall be located by dimension from column lines.

C. At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall obtain, at their expense, reproducible copies of the final drawings and incorporate changes noted on the jobsite work prints onto these drawings. These changes shall be done by a skilled drafter. Each sheet shall be marked "Record Drawing", along with the date. These drawings shall be delivered to the Architect/Engineer.

1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for Delivery, Storage and Handling in addition to requirements specified herein.

B. Equipment and material shall be de livered to the job site in their original containers with labels intact, fully identified with manufacturer's name, model, model number, type, size, capacity and Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. labels and other pertinent information necessary to identify the item.

C. Deliver, receive, handle and store equipment and materials at the job site in the designated area and in such a manner as to prevent equipment and materials from damage and loss. Store equipment and materials delivered to the site on pallets and cover with waterproof, tear resistant tarp or plastic or as required to keep equipment and materials dry. Follow manufacturer's recommendations, and at all times, take every precaution to properly protect equipment and material from damage, to include th e erection of temporary shelters to adequately protect equipment and material stored at the Site. Equipment and/or material which become rusted or damaged shall be replaced or restored by the Contractor to a condition acceptable to the Architect.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of his own tools, material and equipment.

1.14 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for Guarantees and Warranties in addition to requirements specified herein.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-8
B. Each system and element thereof shall be warranted against defects due to faulty workmanship, design or material for a period of 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, unless specific items are noted to carry a longer warranty in the Construction Documents or manufac turer's standard warranty. The Contractor shall remedy defects occurring within a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion or as stated in the General Conditions.

C. The following additional items shall be guaranteed:

1. Piping shall be free from obstructions, holes or breaks of any nature.

2. Insulation shall be effective.

3. Proper circulation of fluid in each piping system.

D. The above guarantees shall include both labor and material; and repairs or replacements shall be made without additional cost to the Owner.

E. The remedial work shall be performed promptly, upon written notice from the Architect or Owner.

F. At the time of Substantial Completion, deliver to the Owner warranties with terms extending beyond the one year guarantee period, each warranty i nstrument being addressed to the Owner and stating the commencement date and term.

1.15 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for Temporary Facilities requirements in addition to requirements specified herein.

B. Construction Facilities: Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations properly and adequately.

1. Enclosures: When temporary enclosures are required to ensure adequate workmanship, weather p rotection and ambient conditions required for the work, provide fire -retardant treated lumber and plywood; provide tarpaulins with UL label and flame spread of 15 or less; provide translucent type (nylon reinforced polyethylene) where daylighting of enclosed space would be beneficial for workmanship, and reduce use of temporary lighting.

2. Heating: Provide heat, as necessary, to protect work, materials and equipment from damage due to dampness and cold. In areas where building is occupied, maintain a temperature not less than 65 degrees Fahrenheit. Use steam, hot water, or gas from piped distribution system where available. Where steam, hot water or piped gas are not available, heat with self-contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters, bearing UL, FM or other approval labels appropriate for application. Vent fuel-burning heaters, and equip units with individual-space thermostatic controls. Use electric -resistance space heaters only where no other, more energy-efficient, type of heater is available and allowable.

1.16 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditions Affecting Work In Existing Buildings:

1. The Drawings describe the general nature of remodeling to the existing building. However, the Contractor shall visit the Site prior to submitting his bid to determine the nature and extent of work involved.

2. Work in the existing building shall be scheduled with the Owner.

3. Certain demolition work must be performed prior to the remodeling. The Mechanical Contractor shall perform the demolition which involves Mechanical systems, equipment, piping, equipment supports or foundations and materials.

4. Mechanical Co ntractor shall remove articles which are not required for the new Work.

Unless otherwise indicated, each item removed by the Mechanical Contractor during this demolition shall become his property and shall be removed by the Mechanical Contractor from the premises and dispose of them in accordance with applicable federal, state and local regulations.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-9

5. Mechanical Contractor shall relocate and reconnect Mechanical facilities that must be relocated in order to accomplish the remodeling shown in the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications. Where Mechanical equipment or materials are removed, the Mechanical Contractor shall cap unused piping beyond the floor line or wall line to facilitate restoration of finish.

6. General Contractor shall install finish material.

7. Obtain permission from the Architect for channeling of floors or walls not specifically noted on the Drawings.

8. Protect adjacent materials indicated to remain. Install and maintain dust and noise barriers to keep dirt, dust, and noise from being transmitted to adjacent areas. Remove protection and barriers after demolition operations are complete.

9. Locate, identify, and protect mechanical services passing through demolition area and serving other areas outside the demolition limits. Maintain services to areas outside demolition limits. When services must be interrupted, install temporary services for affected areas.

B. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within the limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers to wet substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PERMITS
A. Secure and pay for permits required in connection with the installation of the Mechanical Work.

Arrange with the various utility companies for the installation and connection of required utilities for this facility and pay charges associated therewith including connection charges and inspection fees, except where these services or fees are designated to be provided by others.

3.2 ACCEPTANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform acceptance test procedures in accordance with the specifications listed in the Reference Joint Appendices for the Building Energy Efficiency Standards of California. Reference the Non - Residential Certificate of Compliance (NRCC) forms on the drawings for the systems which shall be tested.

B. Submit Non-Residential Certificate of Acceptance (NRCA) forms for each system for which the CMATT is responsible.

3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 02 and General Conditions for Selective Demolition requirements in addition to the requirements specified herein.

B. General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned mechanical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or saved.

C. Materials and Equipment to Be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing mechanical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and salvaged, and deliver materials and equipment to the location designated for storage.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-10
D. Disposal and Cleanup: Remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials and equipment not indicated to be salvaged.

E. Mechanical Materials and Equipment: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the following items:

1. Inactive and obsolete piping, fittings and specialties, equi pment, ductwork, controls, and insulation.
a. Piping and ducts embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such materials do not interfere with new installations. Remove exposed materials and materials above accessible ceilings. Drain and cap pipi ng and ducts allowed to remain.
b. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 01, General Conditions and "Cutting and Patching" portion of this Section in Division 23.

F. Provide schedules indicating proposed methods and seq uence of operations for selective demolition prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut -off of utility services and details for dust and noise control.

1. Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified in Division 01 Section "Summary of Work."

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut walls, floors, ceilings, and other portions of the facility as required to install work under this Division.

B. Obtain permission from the Architect prior to cutting. Do not cut or disturb structural members without prior approval from the Architect and Structural Engineer.

C. For post-tension slabs, x-ray slab and closely coordinate all core drill locations with Architect and Structural Engineer prior to performing any work. Obtain approval from Architect and Structura l Engineer for all core drills and penetrations at least four days prior to performing work.

D. Penetrations shall be made as small as possible while maintaining required clearances between the building element penetrated and the system component.

E. Patch around openings to match adjacent construction, including fire ratings, if applicable.

F. Repair and refinish areas disturbed by work to the condition of adjoining surfaces in a manner satisfactory to the Architect.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Dirt and refuse resulting from the perf ormance of the work shall be removed from the premises as required to prevent accumulation. The Mechanical Contractor shall cooperate in maintaining reasonably clean premises at all times.

B. Immediately prior to the final inspection, the Mechanical Contract or shall clean material and equipment installed under the Mechanical Contract. Dirt, dust, plaster, stains, and foreign matter shall be removed from surfaces including components internal to equipment. Damaged finishes shall be touched-up and restored to their original condition.

3.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION REVIEW
A. Prior to requesting inspection for "CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION", the Contractor shall complete the following items:

1. Submit complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Submit complete Record Drawings.

3. Perform special inspections as required in each individual Section.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-11

4. Start-up testing of systems.

5. Removal of temporary facilities from the site.

6. Comply with requirements for Substantial Completion in the "General Conditions".

B. The Contractor shall request in writing a review for Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall give the Architect/Engineer at least seven (7) days notice prior to the review.

C. The Contractor's written request shall state that the Contractor has complied wit h the requirements for Substantial Completion.

D. Upon receipt of a request for review, the Architect/Engineer will either proceed with the review or advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.

E. If the Contractor requests a site visit for Substantial Co mpletion review prior to completing the above mentioned items, He shall reimburse the Architect/Engineer for time and expenses incurred for the visit.

F. Upon completion of the review, the Architect/Engineer will prepare a "final list" of outstanding items to be completed or corrected for final acceptance.

G. Omissions on the "final list" shall not relieve the Contractor from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

H. Prior to requesting a final review, the Contractor shall submit a copy of the final list of items to be completed or corrected. He shall state in writing that each item has been completed, resolved for acceptance or the reason it has not been completed.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-12

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 00 10-13

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

ELECTRICAL COORDINATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
23 00 15-1
SECTION 23 00 15 - ELECTRICAL COORDINATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment.

B. System shall be complete and operational with power and control wiring provided to meet the design intent shown on the drawings and specified within the specification sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. No separate submittal is required. Submit product data for electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as requ ired by the individual equipment specification Sections.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical components and materials shall be UL labeled.

B. All electrical equipment provided and the wiring and installation of electrical equipment shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Section and Division 26.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractors shall provide all wire, conduit, etc. as specified in the Construction Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all equipment, controls, etc. shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with Table 1. Any items not listed but shown on the drawings shall be considered part of the Contract Documents and brought to the attention of the Architect.

B. The General Contractor is the central authority governing the total responsibility of all trade contractors. Therefore, deviations and clarifications of this sche dule are permitted provided the General Contractor assumes responsibility to coordinate the trade contractors different than as indicated herein. If deviations or clarifications to this schedule are implemented, submit a record copy to the Engineer.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

ELECTRICAL COORDINATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
23 00 15-2
TABLE 1: ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

ITEM FURN SET POWER CONTROL

BY BY WIRING WIRING
Control relays DIV23t DIV23t DIV26 DIV23t
Thermostats (low voltage) DIV23t DIV23t --- DIV23t
Control power transformers DIV23t DIV23t DIV26 DIV23t
Control power transformers DIV23m DIV23m DIV26 DIV23t
furnished with equipment
Temperature control panels DIV23t DIV23t DIV26 DIV23t
(housing controllers)
Building controllers, advanced DIV23t DIV23t DIV23t DIV23t application controllers, and
application specific controllers
Motor and solenoid operated valves DIV23t DIV23m DIV23t DIV23t DIV23m = Mechanical Contractor DIV23t = Temperature Controls Sub-Contractor DIV26 = Electrical Contractor

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00-1
SECTION 23 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application with mechanical installations as follows:

1. Mechanical equipment nameplate data.

2. Sleeves for mechanical penetrations.

3. Miscellaneous metals for support of mechanical materials and equipment.

4. Joint sealers for sealing around mechanical materials and equipment.

5. Sealing penetrations through noise critical spaces.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 01 and Division 23 Section General Mechanical Requirements.

1. Product data for the following products:
a. Acoustical sealers.

1.3 NOISE CRITICAL SPACES
A. Areas of the building, referred to as "noise -critical spaces", require special attention (special acoustical provisions and restrictions). The table below designates t he noise -critical spaces; noise levels due to equipment, ductwork, terminal devices, etc., shall permit attaining sound pressure levels in all 8 octave bands in occupied spaces conforming to RC levels per ASHRAE handbook as indicated.

Space RC Levels
Ballroom 30
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA
A. For each piece of power operated mechanical equipment, provide a permanent operational data nameplate indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliance's, and similar essential data.

Locate nameplates in an accessible location.

2.2 PENETRATIONS
A. Sleeves:

1. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanize d, welded steel pipe, ASTM A -53 grade A or 12 gauge (0.1084 inches) welded galvanized steel formed to a true circle concentric to the pipe.

2. Sheet-Metal Sleeves: 10 gauge (0.1382 inches), galvanized steel, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Frames for rectangular openings attached to forms and of a maximum dimension established by the Architect. For sleeve cross -section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, provide 18 gauge (0.052 inches) welded galvaniz ed steel. For sleeve

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00-2
cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, provide 10 gauge (0.1382 inches) welded galvanized steel. Notify the General Contractor or Architect bef ore installing any box openings not shown on the Architectural or Structural Drawings.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36.

B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded.

E. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required.

2.4 JOINT SEALERS
A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application.

B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. Nonacid Curing Sealer: One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with AS TM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non -traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Dow Corning, Dowsil 790.
b. Dow Corning, Dowsil 795.
c. GE, Silglaze II SCS 2350.
d. GE, Silpruf SCS 2000.
e. Owens Corning, Energy Complete.
f. Pecora, 864 NST.
g. Tremco, Spectrem 1.
h. Tremco, Spectrem 2.

D. High Humidity Sealer: One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non -traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates; and subject to in -service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Dow Corning, Dowsil 786.
b. GE, Momentum SCS1700.
c. Pecora, 898 Silicone NST.

E. Hybrid Joint Seal er: One-part, non-sag, paintable complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, recommended for exposed applications on interior and exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 50 percent.

1. Manufacturers:
a. BASF, MasterSeal NP 100.
b. Pecora, DyanTrol I-XL.
c. Tremco, Dymonic FC.

F. Acrylic Latex Joint Seal er: One -part, non -sag, mildew -resistant, paintable acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic l atex, complying with ASTM C834 , Type OP, Grade NF , recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00-3

1. Manufacturers:
a. Pecora, AC-20
b. Sherwin Williams 950A
c. Tremco, Tremflex 834

2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANTS
A. General: Penetrations by ducts, pipes and conduit through surfaces that are around and between noise critical spaces shall be sleeved, packed and sealed airtight with foam rod, non -hardening sealant and/or packing material as described herein.

B. Foam Rod: Foam backer rod shall be closed cell polyethylene suitable for use as a backing for non-hardening sealant.

C. Non-Hardening Sealant: Sealant for penetrations shall be non-hardening. Permanently flexible, approved firestop putty may be used in lieu of the sealant on foam rod in noise critical walls that are also fire rated.

D. Packing Material: Mineral fiber; non -combustible; resistant to water, mildew and vermin.

Expanding resilient foams manufactured for this purpose are an acceptable alternative only if the material density is at least 15 pcf (40 kg/m3).

E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834. Product effectively reduces a irborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90. Meeting ASTM E84 for a smoke flame spread index of less than 25 / 50.

F. Manufacturers:

1. Pecora, AC-20 FTR.

2. Pecora, AIS-919.

3. USG, SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.2 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

3.3 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS
A. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer.

B. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00-4

3.4 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS
A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants.

2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic-emulsion joint sealants.

B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.

Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

3.5 PENETRATIONS:

1. 3.6 ACOUSTICAL PENETRATIONS
A. General: There shall be no direct contact of Sheet Metal or piping with bulkhead walls. All openings around pipes and ducts in the structure surrounding the mechanical equipment and surrounding noise-critical spaces shall be sealed, packed with caulking for the full depth of the penetration, as described herein.

B. Duct Penetrations: Where each duct passes through a bulkhead wall of a noise critical space, there shall be a clear annular space of 1 inch between the duct and structure. After all of the ductwork is inst alled, the Contractor shall check the clearance, pack the voids full depth with packing material and caulk both ends with non -hardening sealant backed by foam rod or permanently flexible firestop material. Where there is not sufficient access space to pack around all sides of a duct (for example, at the underside of a slab), place a short stub duct in the wall, pack and caulk around it and then attach the inlet and outlet ducts to each end.

C. HVAC Piping:

1. Provide a steel sleeve grouted into the structure. The internal diameter of the sleeve shall be 2 inches larger than the external diameter of the pipe passing through it. After all of the piping is installed in that area, verify the specified clearance and correct it, if necessary, to within 1/2 inch. Pack the void full depth with packing material sealed at both ends, 1 inch deep, with non-hardening sealant backed by foam rod.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
23 05 10-1
SECTION 23 05 10 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Joining materials.

B. Unions.

C. Dielectric waterway fittings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 01 and Division 23 Section “ General Mechanical Requirements ” for administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.

B. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit welders' certificates specified in Article “ Quality Assurance” below.

C. Piping Schedule: Submit a piping schedule that sta tes the material being proposed for each piping system application in the project including manufacturer ’s catalog information , pipe materials, sizes, fittings, T ype, Grade, Schedule, applicable ASTM standard , and connection method(s).

D. Submit a schedule of dissimilar metal joints and dielectric flanges, flange kits, or waterway fittings.

Include proposed product, joint type materials, and connection method to isolate dissimilar metals. Refer to the individual Division 23 piping system specificatio n sections for piping materials and fittings relative to that particular system and additional requirements.

E. Submit certification that fittings and specialties are manufactured in plants located in the United States or certified that they comply with applicable ANSI and ASTM standards.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods and joining procedures.

G. Shop Drawings: Include d etailed fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure.

H. As-built drawings for each piping system in electronic and PDF format.

I. Refer to the individual piping system specification sections in Division 23 for additional requirements.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section IX, “Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Qualifications.” B. Comply with ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping, most recent edition.

C. Soldering and Brazing procedures shall conform to ANSI B9.1 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

D. Pipe specialties and fittings shall be manufa ctured in plants located in the United States or certified to meet the specified ASTM, ASME, and ANSI standards.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
23 05 10-2
E. Refer to the individual piping system specification sections in Division 23 for additional requirements.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

C. Refer to the individual piping system specification sections in Division 23 for additional requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to the individual piping system specification sections in Division 23 for specifications on piping and fittings relative to that particular system.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 Piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

C. Brazing Filler Metals : Comply with SFA -5.8, Section II, ASME BPVC for brazing filler metal materials appropriate for the materials being joined.

1. AWS A5.8, Classification BAg–5:
a. Silver (Ag) 44.0 – 46.0 percent.
b. Zinc (Z) 23.0 – 27.0 percent.
c. Copper (Cu) 29.0 – 31.0 percent.

2. AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP–5:
a. Phosphorus (P) 4.8 - 5.2 percent.
b. Silver (Ag) 14.5 - 15.5 percent.
c. Copper (Cu) remainder.

D. Soldering Filler Metals: ASTM B32 , 95-5 Tin-Antimony and water flushable flux in accordance with ASTM B813.

2.3 UNIONS:

A. Manufacturers:

1. Anvil International.

2. Hart Industries.

3. Mueller Streamline Co.

4. Victaulic Company of America.

5. Watts Regulator Co.

6. Approved equal.

B. Hexagonal stock, with ball -and-socket joints, metal -to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends.

1. Malleable-iron: ASME B16.39, class as specified in section “Hydronic Piping” for the piping system used.

2. Bronze: ASME B16.15, cast bronze body meeting ASTM B62, class as specified in section “Hydronic Piping” for the piping system used.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
23 05 10-3

2.4 DIELECTRIC WATERWAY FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Grinnell Mechanical Products.

2. Victaulic Company of America (Sweat and threaded connections only).

3. Approved equal.

A. Electroplated steel, brass, bronze, or nylon encapsulated nipple, with an inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining , and appropriate end connections for the pipe materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, grooved, or flanged) to effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris for both inside and outside of piping and fittings before assembly.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as i ndicated. Refer to individual system specifications for requirements for coordination drawing submittals.

C. Install piping free of sags and bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.

D. Support piping from structure. Do not support piping from ceilings, equipment, ductwork, conduit and other non-structural elements.

E. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4 inch ball valve, and short 3/4 inch threaded nipple and cap.

F. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

G. Remake leaking joints using new materials.

H. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

I. Piping Protection:

1. Protect piping during construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

2. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.

3.3 PENETRATIONS
A. Acoustical Barrier Penetrations:

1. Where a pipe passes through a bulkhead wall, a steel sleeve shall be grouted into the structure. Refer to Section “ Common Work Results for HVAC ” for noise critical spaces.

The internal diameter of the sleeve shall be minimum of 2 inches large r than the external diameter of the pipe. After the piping is installed, the Contractor shall check the clearance

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
23 05 10-4
and correct it to within 1/2-inch. Contractor shall pack the void full depth with glass/mineral fiber insulation and seal at both ends, 1-inch deep, with sealant backed by foam rod.

2. Penetration of sound isolating ceilings by sprinkler pipes and heads shall be sleeved and sealed and shall have no rigid connections between them.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
B. Threaded Joints:

1. Provide tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.

2. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inner diameter.

3. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends and proximity of internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.

4. Align threads at point of assembly.

5. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the male pipe threads except where dry seal threading is specified.

6. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. Tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

7. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads which are corroded or damaged.

C. Brazed and Soldered Joints:

1. Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Soldering Manual."

2. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual."

3. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation.

4. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts at piping specialties before brazing.

1. Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the cup of the fittings, using very fine emery cloth, prior to making joint.

2. Wipe tube and fittings clean and apply flux. Flux shall not be used as the sole means for cleaning tube and fitting surfaces.

5. Copper-to-copper joints shall be made using BCuP-5 brazing filler metal without flux.

6. Dissimilar metals such as copper and brass shall be jointed using an appropriate flux with either BCuP-5 or BAg-5 brazing filler metal. Apply flux sparingly to the clean tube only and in a manner to avoid leaving any excess inside the completed joint.

7. Continuously purge the pipe and fittings during brazing with an inert gas (i.e., dry nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale. Maintain purge until the joint is cool to the touch.

8. Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform temperature.

9. Provide temporary cap or cover on completed joints with open ends to prevent entry of contaminating materials.

3.5 UNIONS
A. Install unions on pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

3.6 DIELECTRIC WATERWAY FITTINGS
A. Install dielectric waterway fittings for piping 2 inch and smaller for copper or brass pipe connections to carbon steel equipment connections.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
23 05 10-5

3.7 PIPE FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Refer to individual piping system specification sections.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 23-1
SECTION 23 05 23 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Applications.

1. General duty valves common to most mechanical piping systems.

2. Special purpose valves are specified in individual piping system specifications.

B. General requirements.

C. Ball valves.

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 01 submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on valves including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, pressure and temperature classifications, valve design, body material, seating materials, and trim material..

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer:

1. Obtain valves for each valve type from a single manufacturer.

2. Company must specialize in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.

3. Subject to compliance requirements, provide products from one of the manufacturers listed in Valve Schedule in Part 3.

B. Valves shall be certified to meet the specified ASTM, ASME, ANSI, and MSS standards in Part 2 Products, and as follows:

1. ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the manufacturers listed in the Valve Schedule in Part 3.

2.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Provide the following valves for the applications if not indicated on Drawings:

1. Isolation (Hydronic): Ball.

B. Required Valve End Connections:

1. Copper Tube:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 23-2
a. 2 NPS and Smaller: Threaded or solder-joint valve ends.

C. Heating Hot Water Valves:

1. 2 NPS and Smaller:
a. Minimum Class: 150.
b. Body: Bronze.
c. Allowable Valve Types:
1) Ball: Two piece.

2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: No less than rating indicated; as required for system pressures and temperatures.

B. Valve Sizes: Match upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

C. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Hand Lever: Quarter-turn valves 6 NPS and smaller, vinyl-covered.

D. Valves in Insulated Piping: Provide stem extensions so valve operator extends a minimum of 1/2 inches outside of the insulation and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: Extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

E. Valve-End Connections:

1. Threaded End Valves: ASME B1.20.1.

2. Solder Joint Connections: ANSI B16.18.

F. General ASME Compliance:

1. Building Services Piping Valves: ASME B31.9.

G. Bronze Valves:

1. Fabricate from dezincification resistant material.

2. Copper alloys containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

H. Source Limitations: Obtain each valve type from a single manufacturer.

2.4 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. Two Piece, Class 150, for valves 2 inch and smaller:

1. Comply with MSS SP-110.

2. CWP Rating: 600 psi.

3. Body: Bronze, ASTM B584.

4. Trim: Bronze.

5. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

6. Seats and Seals: PTFE.

7. Stem: Blowout-proof.

8. Ball: Full port, chrome plated brass.

9. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel handle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Discard all packing materials and verify that valve interior, including threads are completely clean without signs of damage or degradation that could result in leakage.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 23-3
B. Verify valve parts to be fully operational in all positions from closed to fully open.

C. If valve is determined to be defective, replace with new valve.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Locate valves for easy access.

C. Install shut-off duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

D. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

E. Valves with soldered end connections:

1. Use solder with a melting point as follows:
a. Below 421 degrees F for ball valves.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leak; replace valves if leak persists.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare valves to receive finish painting or insulation.

B. Inspect valves for leaks after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Adjust or replace packing, as required, on valves with leaks.

Replace valve if leak persists.

3.5 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Bronze Ball Valves – 2 inch and smaller, Class 150:

1. Model for chrome plated brass ball indicated. Furnish SS ball if specified in Part 2.

MANUFACTURER THREADED ENDS SOLDER ENDS
Apollo 77C-140 77C-240
Bray S51 --
Hammond 8301A 8311A
Milwaukee BA-400 BA-450
Nibco T-585-70 S-585-70
Watts LFB6080G2 LFB6081G2
END OF SECTION 23 05 23

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29-1
SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Support and attachment components.

B. Horizontal piping hangers and supports.

C. Saddles and shields.

D. Anchors and fasteners.

E. Miscellaneous materials.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports with the actual equipment and components to be installed.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations.

4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each type of hanger and support. Include a hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each hanger and support. Submit style and type to Structural Engineer for approval prior to installation.

B. Product Certificates: Signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying the products meet the specified requirements.

C. Welder Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" Article.

D. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution. Include dimensions, weights, required clearances, and method of assembly.

1. Application of protective inserts, saddles, and shields at pipe hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

E. Installer's Qualifications: Include evidence of compliance with specified requirements.

F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, exami nation, preparation, and installation of product.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with applicable building code.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29-2
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Installer Qualifications for Field-Welding:

1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

3. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME BPVC Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
D. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide hangers and supports with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by UL 723 or ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) method.

E. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

1.1 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:

1. Comply with MSS SP-58.

2. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of work.

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where applicable.

4. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the loa d to be supported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless specifically indicated or permitted.

6. Materials: Products a nd materials listed in this specification are based on indoor, dry locations.
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Carbon steel, galvanized steel, zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent w here installed for piping and equipment that will not have a factory - applied or field-applied finish, unless otherwise indicated. b. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. c. Galvanized Steel: Hot -dip galvanized a fter fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.
d. Stainless Steel: Type 304 in accordance with ASTM A240.

B. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line.
b. Ferguson Enterprises/FNW.
c. PHD Manufacturing.
d. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
e. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc.
f. Source Limitations: Furnish channels (struts) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware produced by a single manufacturer.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29-3

2. Factory-fabricated continuous -slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports.

3. Comply with MSS SP -69, Type 59, MSS SP -89, and MFMA-4. Welds shall comply with AWS D1.1.

4. Channel Material:
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel. b. All nuts, brackets, and clamps shall have the same finish as the channel.

5. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch.

6. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height with factory-punched attachment holes.

7. Provide plastic galvanic isolators for connecting bare copper pipe for use with pre - engineered support strut system where indicated.

C. Hanger Rods:

1. Threaded zinc-plated steel, threaded both ends or continuously threaded, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Minimum Size: Reference piping specification sections for rod thicknesses.

3. Threaded Rods: Threaded rods are not allowed for floor supports except when the maximum length of the rod is less than 12”. Threaded rod sizes shall be the same size diameter as specified for pipe hanger rods based upon pipe size being supported. Refer to system piping specification sections for rod size requirements.

D. Wire Rope Pipe Hanging Systems:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Anvil International.
b. Gripple.

2. General: Wire rope hanger system shall have a minimum 5 to 1 safety factor based upon the applied working load being supported.

3. Source Limitations: Furnish associated fittings, accessories, and hardware produced by a single manufacturer.

4. Cast-in-place Concrete Insert: Pressed steel body with sintered steel wedge, 302 stainless steel spring and UV stabilized homopolymer polypropylene end cap. Model: Gripple Spider Hanging Kit.

5. Cable Stud: Carbon steel, zinc -coated, designed for attachment to concrete inserts.

Model: Anvil C120.

6. Cable Coupling: Carbon steel, zinc -coated, designed for attachment to threaded rods.

Model: Anvil C130.

7. Cable Eyelet: Carbon steel, zinc -coated, designed to be directly attached to structural supports via anchors or fasteners. Model: Anvil C150.

8. Cable Toggle: Carbon steel, zinc -coated, with toggle designed for insertion into 1/2 inch hole through steel deck hat channel and provides anchor when pulled in tension. Model:

Anvil C150.

9. Swivel Toggle Insert: Single assembly attached to wire rope cable , manufactured from plated carbon steel toggle, pins, and shackles; swivel insert engineered to be compatible with concrete insert.

10. Wire Rope: High tensile steel wire rope, to ASTM A1023, Class A zinc coating; minimum 7 by 7 cross -sectional thread construction; having a tensile strength of 256,000 psi; No.3 wire size minimum.

11. Adjustable Fastener: Mild steel (type UG2), bright zinc plated, one-channel body; encasing a series of Type 302 stainless -steel springs with serrated self -locking grade 40 chrome steel balls, adjustable by means of an integrated mechanism, capable of accommodating load of 500 lb. Model: Gripple No. 2, 3 or 4 UniGrip.

2.2 HORIZONTAL PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Armacell.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29-4

2. Anvil International.

3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

4. Elite Components.

5. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co./Caddy

6. Ferguson/FNW.

7. Halfen-DEHA.

8. Hilti.

9. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

10. PHD Manufacturing.

11. Power-Strut.

12. Unistrut.

B. Single Hangers:

1. Band Hanger: Carbon steel, adjustable band, adjustable swivel.

2. Split Ring: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring type.

3. Clevis Hanger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis type.

C. Trapeze and Strut-mounted Supports:

1. Two-piece clamp: Designed for use with channel strut, held in place at channel shoulder when clamp attachment nut is tightened.

D. Hangers and strut-mounted supports with pre-manufactured polymer inserts:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Anvil International.
b. Holdrite.
c. Klo-Shure.

2. Strut-mounted pipe clamps and clevis ha ngers with pre -manufactured polymer inserts designed to receive butted insulation internally. Inserts shall support piping independent of insulation to avoid crushing. Installed system shall provide equal thermal and vapor barrier performance as systems with continuous unbroken insulation. Metal shields are not required with clevis hangers of this type.

2.3 SHIELDS
A. Insulation Protection Shield:

1. Sheet metal construction, meeting MSS SP-58 Type 40, of 18 gauge for 5-1/2 inches inside dimension and smaller, 16 gauge for 6 -1/2 inches to 10-3/4 inches inside dimension, 14 gauge for 11-3/4 inches to 17 inches inside dimension, and 12 gauge for 18 inches to 28 inches inside dimension.

2. Shield shall cover half of the circumference of the pipe and shall be of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.

3. For pipes 2 inch and smaller without pre-insulated supports, provide insulation protection shields installed between hanger and pipe which meets the following minimum length requirements:

Pipe Insulation Minimum Shield Length, (in)
Size Thickness 5 6 7 8 9 10
(NPS) (inches) Hanger Spacing, (ft)

0.5 5 6 8 - - -
1 3 5 5 - - -
≤ 1 1.5 3 5 5 - - -
2 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 - - -

0.5 8 8 11 11 12 14
1 5 6 8 9 11 11
≤ 2 1.5 5 6 8 8 9 9
2 5 5 6 6 8 8
3 5 5 6 6 6 8

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29-5

2.4 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hilti, Inc.

2. Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3. Phillips.

4. Powers Fasteners, Inc.

5. Rawl.

6. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications.

1. Steel: Use beam clamps.

2. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

C. Beam Clamps: MSS SP-58 C-Type or adjustable, Types 19 through 23, 25 or 27 through 30 based on required load.

1. Material: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel or ASTM A181/A181M forged steel.

1. Provide clamps with hardened steel cup -point set screws and lock -nuts for anchoring in place.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

B. Malleable Iron: ASTM A47
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Provide hangers and supports according to the Pipe Hanger and Support Schedule below.

C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC -ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.

D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, conduit, or other systems.

E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.

F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck.

G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer.

H. Provide thermal insulated pipe supports complete with hangers and access ories. Install thermal insulated pipe supports during the installation of the piping system.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29-6

3.3 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, or MSS SP-58 unless indicated otherwise.

B. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.

C. Space attachments within maximum piping span length specified in Division 23 piping sections.

D. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

E. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure.

F. Do not attach to ceilings, equipment, ductwork, conduit and other non -structural elements such as floor and roof decking.

G. Hanger and clamps sizing:

1. Hot Piping: Provide pipe hangers sized for the pipe outside diameter.

H. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, Contractor has option to provide metal channel strut framing . Install supports with maximum spacing specified within Division 23 piping sections.

1. Space strut framing at the required distance for the smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Where strut systems are attached to walls, install anchor bolts per manufacturer’s recommendations.
a. Uninsulated Copper Pipe: Install with plastic galvanic isolators b. Insulated Tube or Pipe: Install with 360  insulation protection shields or pre - engineered thermal hanger-shield inserts as specified in Division 23 Section “HVAC Insulation”.

I. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. Provide two nuts on threaded supports to securely fasten the support.

J. Install appropriate types of hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded.

M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.

1. Insulation Protection Shield: Install insulation protection shield with high density insulation insert where vapor barrier is indicated, sized for the insulation thickness used as specified in Division 23 Section “HVAC Insulation”. Do not use polymer-based shields for hot piping. a. Exception for horizontal cold piping with fiberglass, cellular glass, flexib le elastomeric, or polyisocyanurate insulation 2 inch and smaller: Rest fiberglass insulated pipe on hanger shield with length specified for pipe size and insulation thickness to prevent puncture or other damage.

N. Strut Framing Systems: Channel strut systems can be used at the Contractors option in lieu of individual hangers for horizontal pipes. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping.

Space channel strut systems at the required distance for the sm allest pipe supported. Provide channel gauge and hanger rods per the manufacturer’s recommendations for the piping supported. Where strut systems are attached to walls, install anchor bolts per manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. Insulated Tube or Pipe: Install with 360 degree insulation protection shields or pre - engineered thermal hanger -shield inserts as specified in Division 23 Section “HVAC Insulation”.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29-7
O. Wire Rope Hanging Systems:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Supported load shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommended load rating.

3. Applications for Pipe Supports:
a. 3 inch and smaller.
b. Wire rope hanging system is not allowed for steam or steam condensate piping.

4. Do not support pipe by wrapping the rope around the pipe.

5. Provide appropriate hanger or support compatible with the wire rope hanging system adjustable fastener as specified in the Pipe Hanger and Support Schedule.

6. Install cast-in-place concrete inserts in elevated concrete slabs.

7. Install bream clamps for attachment to structural beams as required.

3.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT
A. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required.

B. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls.

C. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface -mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

D. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

E. Remove temporary supports.

F. Fabricate structural steel supports to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment from floor.

3.5 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports.

Install and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so that contours welded surfaces to match adjacent contours.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.

B. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

D. For galvanized surfaces clean welds , bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29-8
E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

3.7 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Provide the following acceptable hangers and supports for each type of piping system. Hangers and supports may be single type or strut-mounted:

B. Single Hangers:

1. All pipe sizes 1-1/2 inch and less:
a. Band hanger.
b. Swivel split ring.
c. Clevis hanger.

2. Hot pipe sizes 2 to 4 inches: Clevis hanger.

C. Trapezes and Strut-mounted Supports:

1. All pipe sizes less than 6 inches: Two-piece clamp.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
23 05 48-1
SECTION 23 05 48 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

A. Division 20 Section “Seismic Controls for MEP/F/T Systems” for general requirement and related documents that apply to this section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.

1.4 SUMMARY
A. Seismic bracing, restraints, and controls for all mechanical systems specified herein shall be designed and installed as required by Division 20 Section “Seismic Controls for MEP/F/T Systems”.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals as required by Division 20 Section “Seismic Controls for MEP/F/T Systems” for all mechanical systems specified herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53-1
SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates.

B. Tags.

C. Adhesive-backed duct markers.

D. Stencils.

E. Pipe markers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each product required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Advanced Graphic Engraving, LLC.

B. Brady Corporation.

C. Brimar Industries, Inc.

D. Craftmark.

E. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.

F. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.

G. MIFAB, Inc.

H. Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Direct Company..

2.2 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. General:

1. Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 23 sections. Where more than a single type is specified for application, selection is the installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.

2. Lettering: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification work with the corresponding designations shown on the drawings, scheduled, and specified. If not otherwise indicate d, provide numbering, lettering, and wording as recommended by the manufacturer or as required for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.

B. Air Terminal Units: Tags, stencils, or engraved plastic laminate signs.

C. Automatic Controls: Tags, use the same naming convention coordinated with the building automation system.

D. Control Panels: Nameplates.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53-2
E. Ductwork: Adhesive-backed duct markers. Stencils are only acceptable for concealed ductwork, exterior ductwork, or in mechanical rooms.

F. Piping: Pipe Markers.

2.3 NAMEPLATES
A. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible:

1. Name and mark number.

2. Equipment service.

3. Design capacity.

4. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, rpm, etc.

B. Size: 2-1/2 inch x 4 inch for control panels and components, 4-1/2 inch x 6 inch for equipment.

C. Letter Color: White.

D. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.

E. Background Color:

1. Cooling equipment: Green.

2. Heating equipment: Yellow.

3. Combination cooling and heating equipment: Yellow/Green.

4. Energy reclamation equipment: Brown.

5. Hazardous equipment: Colors and designs recommended by ASME.

6. Equipment and components that do not meet any of the above criteria: Blue.

F. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.

2.4 TAGS
A. Plastic Laminate Tags: Laminated three -layer plastic, minimum 3/32 inch thick, with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1 -1/2 inch diameter and 5/32 inch hole for fastener.

B. Solid Plastic Tags: Solid plastic, minimum 3/32 inch thick, with printed black letters on white color.

Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter and 5/32 inch hole for fastener.

C. Tag Fasteners: Solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S -hooks of the size required for proper attachment of tags to valves, manufactured specifically for that purpose.

D. Letter Height:

1. System Abbreviation: Minimum 1/4 inch.

2.5 ADHESIVE-BACKED DUCT MARKERS
A. Material: High gloss acrylic adhesive-backed vinyl film 0.0032 inch; printed with UV and chemical resistant inks.

B. Style: Individual label.

C. Nomenclature: Include air handling unit identification number, duct size, service, and arrows indicating direction of flow.

D. Color: Yellow background with black lettering or blue background with white lettering.

2.6 STENCILS
A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size, complying with ASME A13.1:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53-3

1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch high letters.

2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 3/4 inch high letters.

3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1 -1/4 inch high letters.

4. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters.

5. Provide arrows indicating direction of flow.

B. Stencil Paint: Oil based, alkyd enamel, either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade, black color, except for piping. For piping systems use colors conforming to ASME A13.1.

2.7 PIPE MARKERS
A. Semi-rigid Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi - rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.

B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings, minimum 3 mil thick.

1. Width: 1-1/2 inch for pipes less than 6 inches (including insulation), 2 -1/2 inch for pipes 6 inches and larger (including insulation).

C. Pipe Marker with Insulation: 1 inch thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125 degrees F or greater. Insulation shall extend 2 inches beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.

D. Nomenclature: Manufacturer's standard pre -printed nomenclature which best describes piping system. Differentiate between supply and return. In the case of a variance, provide nomenclature as selected by the Engineer.

E. Arrows: Provide pipe markers with integral arrows indicating direction of flow or as a separate unit of plastic.

F. Color:

1. Conform to ASME A13.1.

G. Letter Height: Minimum 1/2 inch for pipes up to 3 inch, minimum 1 inch for larger pipes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Division 09 for stencil painting.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identificati on prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Install nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53-4
D. Install tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller.

E. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.

F. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Division 09.

G. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.

3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install identification on the most obviously visible portion of the pipe from the point of access.

B. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Pipes less than 6 inches diameter (including insulation):, Provide full-band pipe markers with 360 degree coverage.

D. Pipes 6 inches diameter and larger (including insulation) : Provide either full -band or strip -type pipe markers.

E. Location: Install piping identification where piping is exposed to view, concealed by a removable ceiling system, located in accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums , etc.) and exterior non-concealed locations as follows:

1. Within 5 feet of each valve, tee, and control device.

2. Within 5 feet of each branch, excluding branches less than 25 feet in length to fixtures or terminal heating and cooling units.

3. Within 5 feet of each side of a penetration of a wall, floor, ceiling, structure, or enclosure.

4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.

5. Within 5 feet of equipment outlets and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced intermediately at a maximum spacing of 50 feet along each riser and run. Reduce spacing to 25 feet in congested areas where there are more than two piping systems or pieces of equipment.

3.4 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide a tag on each valve, cock , and control device . Exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment, HVAC terminal devices , and similar rough -in connections of end- use fixtures and units.

3.5 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
A. Install identification on the most obviously visible portion of the duct from the point of access.

B. Location: Install ductwork identification where ductwork is exposed to view, concealed by a removable ceiling system, located in accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums, etc), and exterior non-concealed locations as follows:

1. Within 5 feet of each control damper or balancing damper, excluding balancing dampers installed in duct take -offs to individual grilles, registers, or diffusers that are less than 25 feet in lengths and installed in the same space as the air device.

2. Within 5 feet of each branch duct, excluding branch ducts that are less than 25 feet in length and located in the same space as the main duct.

3. Within 5 feet of each side of a penetration of a wall, floor, ceiling, structure, or enclosure.

4. Spaced intermittently at a maximum spacing of 50 feet along each duct run . Reduce spacing to 25 feet in congested areas when there are more than two types of duct systems or pieces of equipment.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53-5

5. Within 5 feet of equipment outlets and other points of origin or termination.

6. Install marker on the most obviously visible portion of the duct from point of access.

3.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install nameplates for identification of equipment. Provide additional signs and lettering as follows:

1. To distinguish between multiple units in close proximity.

B. Adjust lettering size based on viewing distance from normal location of identification:

1. Less than 2 feet: Minimum 1/4 inch.

2. Up to 6 feet: Minimum 1/2 inch.

3. Greater than 6 feet: Proportionally increase letter size based on recommendations above.

4. Provide secondary lettering 2/3 to 3/4 of size of principal lettering.

C. Where equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar removeable concealment, equipment tags may be installed in the concealed space to reduce the amount of text in exposed sign.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93-1
SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General testing, adjustment, and balancing requirements.

B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.

C. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.

C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling).

D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals) according to specified design quantities.

E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible results.

F. Report forms: Data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and review. Data should also form the permanent reco rd to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting, and balancing.

G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. Examples include inlets and outlets on water terminals, inlets and outlets from air terminal units, and inlets and outlets on air terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers, louvers, and hoods.

H. Main: Duct or pipe containing the major or entire fluid flow of the system.

I. Submain: Duct or pipe containing part of the system capacity a nd serving two or more branch mains.

J. Branch main: Duct or pipe serving two or more terminals.

K. Branch: Duct or pipe serving a single terminal.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualifications:

1. Submit qualifications of TAB agency.

B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component.

C. Certified TAB Reports:

1. General:
a. Submit within two weeks after completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing. b. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report. c. Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93-2

2. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports, type written, and organized and formatted as specified below. The final report shall be certified proof of the following:
a. The systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards.
b. The report reflects an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed.
c. The report reflects a true representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. d. The report is an accurate record of all final quantities measured to establish normal operating values of the systems.

3. Report Format: Provide reports complete with index page . Include set of drawings indicating air outlets, equipment, and thermostat locations identified to correspond with report forms. Divide the report into the following divisions:
a. General Information and Summary
1) Include project name, location, altitude, and date.
2) Identify TAB agency, contractor, owner, architect, and engineer. 3) Include addresses, contact names, and telephone numbers. 4) Include certification sheet containing the seal, name, address, telephone number, and signature of the certified TAB Supervisor.
5) Include actual instrument list, with ma nufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration.
b. Air Systems
c. Hydronic Systems
d. Temperature Control Systems

4. Report Forms: Standard forms prepared by the TAB certification standard being followed for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. If not specified, follow ASHRAE 111.

5. Units of Measure: Report data in I-P (inch-pound) units only.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ASHRAE Standard 111, Practices for Measurement , Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.

B. Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Applications Volume, Chapter “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing”, most current edition.

C. TAB Agency Qualifications:

1. Act as the single source of responsibility for TAB of the HVAC systems.

2. Staff the project at all times by qualified personnel.

3. Have a minimum of 5 years documented experience on projects with TAB requirements similar to those required for the project.

4. Certified by one of the following Certification Associations:
a. AABC (NSTSB): As sociated Air Balance Council, National Standards for Total System Balance.
b. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau, Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.

D. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications:

1. Certified by the same organization as TAB agency.

2. TAB Supervisor shall be a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the project is located.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Begin work after systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced are fully operational, duct systems are sealed, piping systems have been tested for leaks, and equipment is operational. C omplete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project.

B. Test, adjust, and balance the air systems before hydronic system.

C. All required instrumentation shall be calibrated to tolerances specified in the referenced standards within a period of six months prior to starting the project.

3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions:

1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.

2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.

3. Volume dampers are installed at locations needed for balancing the air systems.

4. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.

5. Air outlets are installed and connected.

6. Visually inspect duct systems to ensure they are sealed and leakage is minimized.

7. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.

8. Hydronic systems are tested for leaks.

9. Test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow -control devices, and balancing valves are properly installed and that their location is accessible.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance.

C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.3 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling Systems: Balance main ducts and equipment to within plus or minus 5 percent of design airflow.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Balance branch ducts and terminal devices to within plus or minus 10 percent of design airflow.

C. Hydronic Systems: Balance to within plus or minus 5 percent of design flow.

3.4 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING
A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

C. Mark on drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the final report.

D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disru pted or that such disruption has been rectified.

E. Cut insulation around ductwork and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93-4
F. Patch and seal insulation, vapor barrier, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed.

G. Seal ducts and piping and test and repair leaks.

H. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

3.5 AIR SYSTEM TESTING, ADJUSTMENT, AND BALANCING PROCEDURE A. Verify volume dampers are installed at locations needed for balancing the air systems.

B. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct traverses.

C. Place outlet dampers in the full open position.

D. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.

E. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

F. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Affect volume control by duct internal devic es such as dampers and splitters.

G. For variable air volume boxes, set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature control.

3.6 HYDRONIC SYSTEM TESTING, ADJUSTMENT, AND BALANCING PROCEDURE A. Open valves to full open position. Close coil bypass valves.

B. Remove and clean all strainers.

C. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

D. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.

E. Affect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings.

Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HVAC INSULATION
23 07 00-1
SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping Insulation.

B. External Ductwork Insulation.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Division 23 Section "Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment ," for insulation shields , pipe saddles, and high-density insulation inserts.

B. Division 23 Section “Metal Ducts” for duct liner insulation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.4 A. Hot Pipe: Piping that carries fluid with a minimum operating temperature greater than 105 degrees F.

B. Cold Duct: Ductwork that carries airflow with a minimum operating temperature less than 55 degrees F temperature.

SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit technical product data, thermal characteristics, and materials for each type of mechanical insulation.

B. Insulation Schedule: Include product name, conductivity k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each service.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualification: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor , Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 50 or less, as tested by UL 723 or ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) method.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral Fiber (rock, slag, or glass):

1. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corp.
b. Johns Manville.
c. Knauf Insulation.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HVAC INSULATION
23 07 00-2
d. Owens Corning.

2. Insulation: ASTM C547, Type I or II, rigid mineral fiber, pre-formed for the application. a. K-value: ASTM C518 or C177, maximum 0.24 at 75 degrees F. b. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F
c. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F for Type I, 1200 degrees F for Type II.
d. Density: Between 3 to 6 pounds per cubic foot for Type I, between 6 to 8 pounds per cubic foot for Type II.

3. Factory Applied Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I.
a. All-Service Jacket (ASJ): Paper/Foil/Scr im, water vapor permeance of 0.02 perms and self-sealing lap.
b. Color: White.

B. Pipe Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, cement, and other appurtenances as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Pipe, Valve and Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C450 for fabrication of fitting covers for pipe, valves and fittings.

2.2 EXTERNAL DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Flexible Mineral Fiber (rock, slag, or glass):

1. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corp.
b. Johns Manville.
c. Knauf Insulation.
d. Owens Corning.

2. Insulation: ASTM C553, Type I or II, flexible mineral fiber blanket. a. K-value: ASTM C518 or C177, maximum 0.31 at 75 degrees F. b. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 20 degrees F
c. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees.
d. Density:
1) 0.75 pounds per cubic foot.

3. Factory Applied Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type II. a. Foil Scrim Kraft (FSK): Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, water vapor permeance of 0.02 perms and 2 inch stapling tab.

B. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape and other appurtenances as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Test piping and ductwork for design pressure, liquid tightness, and continuity prior to applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. Repair existing mechanical insulation that is damaged during this construction period. Use insulation of same type and thickness as existing insulation. Install new jacket lapping and sealed over existing.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HVAC INSULATION
23 07 00-3
B. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily at no additional expense to the Owner, including insulation with vapor barrier damage and insulation that has been exposed to moisture during shipping, storage, or installation. Drying th e insulation is not acceptable. Dry surfaces prior to installation of new insulation that replaces the damaged or wet insulation.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

3.4 PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Maintain continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity throughout entire installation and protect it from puncture and other damage.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

C. Hot Pipe Insulation:

1. Insulate entire system, including fittings, valves, unions flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.

2. Provide jackets with or without vapor barrier according to the Piping Jacket Schedule.

3. Secure all-service jacket with self-sealing longitudinal laps.

4. Butt pipe insulation tightly at insulation joints and wrap insulation around supports . Apply 3 inch wide vapor barrier tape or band over joint.

D. Insulation of Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material , vapor barrier coating, and thickness as adjacent pipe. Provide pre-formed insulation pieces, segmented insulation, or sectional pipe insulation for the application. Provide the same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe.

3.5 PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Reference Pipe Insulation Thickness Schedule at the end of this specif ication for thickness requirements based on insulation conductivity.

B. Omit insulation on the following:

1. Heating piping between coil and shutoff valves provided piping is located within heated space and not more than three feet from coil.

2. Flexible connections and expansion joints in pipes with fluids above ambient temperatures.

C. Hot Non-Steam Piping (141 to 200 degrees F (61 to 94 degrees C)):

1. Service:
a. Heating hot water supply and return piping.

2. Acceptable Insulation:
a. Mineral fiber.

3.6 PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE
A. California Building Efficiency Standards (Title 24 – Part 6) Requirements, Pipe Insulation Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness
Insulation Conductivity Nominal Pipe or Tube Size (in.)

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HVAC INSULATION
23 07 00-4
Fluid Operating Conductivity, Mean Rating <1 1 to 1-1/2 4 to ≥8 Temp. Range (°F) Btu·in./(hr·ft²·°F) Temp., °F. <1-1/2 to <4 <8 And Usage
Insulation Thickness, in.
141°F–200°F 0.25–0.29 125 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0

3.7 DUCTWORK INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Maintain continuous thermal and vapor-barrier integrity throughout entire installation and protect it from puncture and other damage.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.

C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

D. Install insulation without sag on underside of duct. Where rectangular ducts a re 24 inches in width or greater, secure external insulation to the bottom of the duct with mechanical fasteners, spaced on 18 inches on center (maximum). Fasteners shall include 2 -inch square self -sticking galvanized carbon-steel base plates with minimum 0.106 -inch diameter zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed shank spindle, length to suit depth of insulation. Secure insulation to spindles with self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent cap retention.

Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers to avoid insulation compression.

E. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operatio n without disturbing wrapping.

F. Cold Ducts:

1. Insulate entire system, including fittings, joints, flanges, expansion joints, and air duct accessories.

2. Provide vapor barrier jacket according to the Ductwork Jacket Schedule.

3. Seal joints with vapor barrier tape.

4. Continue insulation, including vapor barrier, through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.

5. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.

3.8 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Supply Air:

1. Service:
a. Supply ducts from air handling equipment.

2. Acceptable Insulation:
a. Flexible mineral fiber.

3.9 DUCT SYSTEM INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE
A. Flexible Mineral Fiber:

1. Interior Ductwork:
a. 0.75 pounds per cubic foot density:
1) 1-1/2 inch thick, minimum R-4.2.

2. Meet R-value installed at maximum 25% compression, application limited to concealed locations.

B. Ductwork within return air plenums:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HVAC INSULATION
23 07 00-5

1. Foil Scrim Kraft (FSK).

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
23 09 13-1
SECTION 23 09 13 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Control valves.

B. Input/Output sensors and transmitters.

C. Power Supplies.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building Automation System.

B. Control Wiring: Includes conduit, wire and wiring devices to install complete control systems including motor control circuits, interlocks, ther mostats, EP and IP switches and like devices.

Includes all wiring from Intelligent Devices and Controllers to all sensors and points defined in the input/output summary shown on the drawings or specified herein and required to execute the sequence of operations
C. Cv: Design Valve Flow Coefficient.

D. DDC: Direct Digital Control.

E. EPDM: Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer.

F. High voltage: 50 volts or higher.

G. Low voltage: Below 50 volts.

H. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

I. TEFZEL: A modified ETFE (ethylene tetrafluoroethylene) fluoroplastic.

1.3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Reference Division 23 Section ”Electrical Coordination for Mechanical Equipment” for contractor responsibilities.

B. BAS Contractor:

1. Installation of the BAS shall be by the BAS Contractor or his subcontractors.

2. Low voltage control wiring.

3. Coordinate high voltage control wiring to instrumentation and control devices with Division

26. Where high voltage power is required for instrumentation and control devices that is in addition to what is shown on the drawings, the BAS contractor shall cover the cost of providing this wiring.

4. All interlock wiring regardless of voltage (e.g., exhaust fan interlocked to supply fan).

5. Coordinate power wiring to BAS controllers and instrumentation and control devices with Division 26.

6. Coordinate installation of back-box rough-in for wall-mounted control devices sensors, etc. with Division 26. Coordinate with mechanical contractor all locations, quantities, and sizes required for installation by Division 26.

7. Perform startup and demonstration services as specified in Section “Direct Digital Control for HVAC”.

C. Mechanical Contractor:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
23 09 13-2

1. Installation of automatic control valves.

2. Coordinate conduit and wall box rough -in and power wiring requirements for controls and mechanical equipment with Division 26.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 01 for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component.

Include dimensions, capacities, size, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, and finishes of materials.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written detailed operational description of sequences. Submit schedule of valves indicating size, flow, and pressure drop for each valve. For automatic dampers indicate arrangement, velocities, and static pressure drops for each system.

D. Schedule for control valves and actuators, including the following:

1. Tag.

2. Quantity.

3. Model number.

4. Equipment served.

5. Flow at project design conditions.

6. Selected valve flow coefficient (Cv).

7. Pressure differential drop across valve at project design flow conditions and selected Cv.

8. Maximum close-off pressure.

9. Valve Configuration (2-way/3-way).

10. Valve Normal Position and Fail Position (e.g., NO/FO; normally open/fail open).

11. Valve Size.

12. Line Size.

13. Valve Type.

14. Actuator Signal Type (Open/Close, Modulating 0-10 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc, 4-20 mA, etc.)

15. Torque required to close valve at pump shutoff head.

16. Selected actuator maximum torque output.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide for all manufactured components.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances.

G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locatio ns of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. Accurately record actual location of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors.

H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner s name and registered with manufacturer.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

C. Control valves shall be manufactured in plants located in the United States or certified to meet the specified ASTM, ANSI and MSS standards.

D. Measurement devices and sensors shall be calibrated using NIST traceable standards.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
23 09 13-3

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTROL PANELS
A. Construction:

1. Panel shall be UL 508A listed.

2. NEMA 250, general purpose utility enclosures with enameled finished face panel.

3. NEMA 4X utility enclosure for outdoor or wash-down applications.

4. Provide common keying for all panels.

2.2 CONTROL VALVES
A. General:

1. Factory fabricated of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. Each valve shall be equipped with proper packing to ensure there will be no leakage at the valve stem.

2. Pressure Ratings:
a. Valve body and packing rated to withstand the system static head plus the maximum pump head and the maximum temperature of the control medium (i.e. chilled water, steam, hot water, etc.).
1) Body pressure rating 600 psig.
b. Two-way modulating valves and their operators shall have close-off pressure of 200 psig.
c. Two-way modulating valves with equal percentage flow characteristics and their operators sh all be rated to safely operate within a differential pressure range between 2 and 50 psi across the valve without cavitating.

3. Sizing:
a. Hydronic Systems:
1) Modulating: Select valves with an appropriate flow coefficient (Cv) to achieve a minimum design valve authority of 0.5 relative to the total pressure drop of the piping branch the valve controls. Calculate Cv based on the larger of the following:
a) 5-psig pressure drop at the design flow rate specified in the Schedules. b) Valve shall not be less than 1/2 Inch in size.

4. Flow Characteristics:
a. Hydronic Service:
1) Two-way valves: Equal percentage characteristic.

5. End Connections:
a. NPT female ends.
b. Threads:
1) Comply with ASME B16.15 for cast copper alloys, including bronze and brass.

B. Ball Pattern:

1. Size: Reference the Control Valve Schedule in Part 3 for allowable valve size by application.

2. Construction:
a. Body:
1) Forged brass with nickel plating conforming to ASTM B283. b. Up to 2 inches: Two-piece construction
c. Stainless steel, blowout proof stem.
d. Replaceable PTFE seats and EPDM O-ring.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
23 09 13-4

3. Ball: Full port with characterized insert comprised of the following material:
a. Stainless steel.

4. Rangeability: Minimum 50:1.

5. Leakage: Minimum ANSI Class IV per ANSI/FCI 70-2.

6. Design and Testing:
a. MSS SP-110 for threaded ends.

C. Electronic Actuator:

1. Direct mounted, self -calibrating type designed for minimum 60,000 full -stroke cycles at rated force.

2. Supplied from the same manufacturer as the valve. (Belimo LRB24-SR or equal)

3. Include visible position indicator.

4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensation circuitry.

5. Position Feedback: 2-10 Vdc signal.

6. Power Requirements: 24 VAC/DC motor; accepting a 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA signal.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Belimo (basis of design).

2. Bray.

3. Danfoss.

4. Fisher Controls.

5. Griswold Controls.

6. Honeywell.

7. Johnson Controls, Inc.

8. Kele.

9. Schneider Electric.

10. Siemens.

11. Victaulic (Tour & Andersson).

2.3 INPUT/OUTPUT SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS
A. General:

1. Performance Requirements:
a. Device must be compatible with project DDC controllers. b. Elements used shall be general-purpose type.
c. Provide transmitters or transducers with sensors as required, with range suitable for the system encountered.
1) Transmitters and transducers shall have offset and span adjustments. 2) Shock and vibration shall not harm the transmitter or transducer. 3) Transmitters and transducers shall have a zeroing capabi lity of readjusting the transmitter zero.
d. Accuracy requirements shall include the combined effects of linearity, hysteresis, repeatability, and the transmitter.

2. Output: Linear, proportional type over shielded cable pair, 4 - 20 mA or 0 – 10 Vdc signal.

3. Input Power: Low voltage, nominal 24 Vdc.

B. Temperature Sensors:

1. Use thermistor or RTD type temperature sensing elements with characteristics resistant to moisture, vibration, and other conditions consistent with the application without affecting accuracy and life expectancy. Sensor shall be UL 873 listed for temperature equipment.

2. Performance Requirements:
a. Thermistor:
1) Accuracy (All): Plus/minus 0.36 degrees F minimum.
2) Temperature Differential Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.15 degrees F minimum. 3) Resolution: Plus/minus 0.2 degrees F minimum.
4) Heat Dissipation Constant: 2.7 mW per degree C.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
23 09 13-5
5) Drift: 0.04 degree F after 10 years within temperature range. b. RTD:
1) Construct RTD of nickel or platinum with base resistance of 1000 ohms at 70 degrees F. 100 o hm platinum RTD is acceptable if used with project DDC controllers.
2) Accuracy (All): Plus/minus 1 degree F minimum , unless otherwise noted below.
a) Room Sensor Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.5 degrees F minimum. b) Chilled Water Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.5 degrees F minimum. c) Temperature Differential Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.15 degrees F minimum.
3) Resolution: Plus/minus 0.2 degree F.
4) Drift: 0.04 degrees F after 10 years within temperature range. c. Sensing Range:
1) Provide limited range sensors if required to sense the range exp ected for a respective point.
2) Use RTD type sensors for extended ranges beyond minus 30 degrees F to 230 degrees F.
d. Wire Resistance:
1) Use appropriate wire size to limit temperature offset due to wire resistance to

1.0 degree F or use temperature transmitter when offset is greater than 1.0 degree F due to wire resistance.
2) Compensate for wire resistance in software input definition when feature is available in the DDC controller.

3. Room Temperature Sensors:
a. Johnson Controls Mod el NSB8MHC04 0-0, combination temperature, relative humidity, carbon dioxide, motion sensor to match the existing facility. b. Button Sensor for High Finish Spaces: Where noted on the drawings or scheduled, provide cable type, button probe sensor designed for flush mounting in wall or ceiling with the following features:
1) 6 inch leads.

2.4 POWER SUPPLIES
A. Reference Division 23 Section “Direct Digital Controls for HVAC” for DC power supply requirements.

B. Control power transformers shall meet NEMA/ANSI standards.

C. Control power transformers shall be UL listed for Class 2 current-limited service or provided with over-current protection on both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 current-limited service.

D. Connected load on the transformer shall not exceed 80 percent of the transformer’s rated capacity.

E. The core and windings shall be completely encased in a UL approved thermoplastic. No metal parts shall be exposed other than the terminals.

F. Performance Characteristics:

1. Accuracy: Plus/minus 1 percent at 5.0 A full scale output.

G. Provide a disconnect switch for each transformer.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
23 09 13-6
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that systems are ready to receive work.

C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

D. Sequence work to ensure installation of com ponents is complementary to installation of similar components in other systems.

E. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.

3.2 EXISTING EQUIPMENT
A. Supervisory Controller: Existing Johnson Controls FX80 Supervisory Controller (located in mezzanine mechanical room) shall be used for network communication with new terminal unit controllers.

B. Wiring: The contractor may reuse any abandoned wires. The integrity of the wire and its proper applications to the installation are the responsibility of the contractor. The wire shall be properly identified and tested. Unused or redundant wiring that remains in place shall be identified as such.

C. Local Control Panels: The contractor may reuse any existing local control panels to locate new equipment. All redundant equipment within these panels shall be removed. Panel face cover shall be patched to fill all holes caused by removal of unused equipment or replaced with new.

D. Repair: Unless otherwise directed, the contractor is not respons ible for repair or replacement of existing energy equipment and systems, valves, dampers, or actuators. Should the contractor find existing equipment that requires maintenance, notify the engineer immediately.

E. Patch holes and finish to match existing walls.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Cooperate with other contractors performing work on this project as necessary to achieve a complete and coordinated installation. Each Contractor shall consult the Drawings and B. General Workmanship:

1. Install equipment, piping, and wiring/raceway parallel to building lines wherever possible.

2. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

3. Install all equipment in readily accessible locations.

4. All installations shall comply with industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.

5. Install all products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Sensors:

1. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment within which the sensor operates.

2. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by the wall framing.

3. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their raceways or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
23 09 13-7

4. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with calibration documentation.

D. Control Valves:

1. Install pipe reducers for valves smaller than line size. Position reducers as close to valve as possible but at distance to avoid interference and impact to performance. Install with manufacturer-recommended clearance.

2. Install flanges or unions to allow valve removal and installation.

3. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support of valves that cannot be handled by service personnel without hoisting mechanism.

4. Valve Orientation:
a. Install ball valves installed in horizontal piping with stems upright and not more than 15 degrees off of vertical, not inverted.
b. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

3.4 MAINTENANCE
A. Refer to Division 01 c loseout requirements for additional requirements relating to maintenance service.

B. Provide service and maintenance of control system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Provide complete service of controls systems, including call backs, and submit written report of each service call.

3.5 STARTUP AND DEMONSTRATION
A. Control Dampers and Valves:

1. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed back to 100 percent open.

2. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications wi th a cycle time of less than 30 seconds.

3. For control valves equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.

4. Verify that all modulating valves are functional, that the start and span are correct, that direction and normal positions are correct, and that they achieve proper closure.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-1
SECTION 23 09 23 - DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. System Description.

B. Operator Interface.

C. Controllers.

D. Electrical Control Power Wiring and Low Voltage Wiring.

E. Local Area Network.

F. System Software.

G. Controller Software.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI/CEA 709.1.D - Control Network Protocol Specification; 2014.

B. ASHRAE Std 135 - BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks; most current edition.

C. IEEE C37.90.1 – IEEE Standard for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus, most current edition.

D. IEEE C62.41.2 – IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low -Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits, most current edition.

E. ISO 7498 – Information Processing Systems – Open System Interconnection – Basis Reference Model, International Standards Organization, most current edition.

F. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdicti on, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. ASC: Application Specific Controller. Examples include controllers for specific applications (e.g., FCU, VAV box, etc.) that can be configured through any network services software.

A. ATU: Air Terminal Unit (e.g., VAV boxes, fan-powered boxes, fan coil units).

B. BAS: Building Automation System.

C. BTL: BACnet Testing Laboratories. Third party independent testing and listing program for devices which have been tested according to ASHRAE Standard 135.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-2
D. Control Wiring: Includes conduit, wire and wiring devices to install complete control systems including motor control circuits, interlocks, thermostats, EP and IP switches and like devices.

F. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing
G. High voltage: 50 volts or higher.

H. IP: Internet Protocol.

I. LAN: Local Area Network.

J. VLAN: Virtual Local Area Network.

K. Low voltage: Below 50 volts.

A. NiCS: Niagara Compatibility Statement license.

L. OSI: Open System Interconnection
M. PC: Personal Computer.

N. PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement.

O. Point: Point is a generic term used to describe a single item of information in a BAS. Points may be further described as input, output, digital, binary, discrete, analog, modulating, internal, external, virtual or global. Each unique point used by digital control lers, or in a BAS, is typically identified by an address.

1.5 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Reference the following sections for additional contractor responsibilities and coordination:

1. Division 23 Section “Electrical Coordination for Mechanical Equipment.”

2. Division 23 Section “Commissioning for HVAC.”

3. Division 23 Section “Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.” B. Reference Part 3 for additional electrical contractor responsibilities for BAS controls.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 01 and Division 23 Section “General Mechanical Requirements” for submittal procedures.

B. General:

1. The drawings and specifications are not intended to show all details. The BAS contractor shall secure satisfactory information before submitting the proposal and include i n the proposal a sum sufficient to cover all items of labor and material required for the complete installation for the devices and system described.

1. Inform Engineer in writing of any deviation in the exhibits submitted from the requirements of the drawings, specifications, and sequences of operations.

C. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer technical data for each system component and software module required for a complete installation.

2. Indicate dimensions, weights, and enclosure construction for all BAS distributed controllers.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-3

2. Submit technical data on all new software supplied including description of functions performed by software and location within the system where software shall reside. Include all software licensing agreements.

3. Submit the PICS for each BACnet device used in the BAS.

4. Submit the NiCS for each type of Niagara station in the BAS.

D. Power and Communication Wiring Transient Protection:

1. Submit catalog data sheets providing evidence that all BAS products offered by the manufacturer are tested and comply with IEEE C62.41.2.

2. Testing shall include power and communication trunk wiring.

3. Compliance with IEEE C62.41.2 shall imply conformance with IEEE C37.90.1 based on the stated position of ANSI and IEEE.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS
E. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit a trunk cable schematic showing locations of all programmable control units, controllers, and workstations, with associated network wiring. a. Indicate equipment served by each controller on the diagram. b. Indicate switches, power requirements to each controller, and daisy chained controllers.

2. Submit detailed schematic control drawings for each controlled device and equipment. a. Reference all control components to manufacturer make and model number. b. Include all control and power wiring with termination point (controller and terminal number).
c. Include clearly indicated and written sequences of operation referenced to specific control components (e.g., "shall modulate valve V-3").
d. Include default position (e.g., N.O., N.C., etc.) for all components where applicable. e. Clearly differentiate between existing components and new components. f. Include detailed wiring diagrams showing methods of connections to VFDs, motor starters, energy meters, and all other devices, and all other field wiring necessary for system installation.
g. The use of ”typicals” will be allowed where appropriate.

3. Submit detailed drawings for each individual BAS distributed controller. a. Include controller identification.
b. Include components included in the controller. c. Include numbering of terminals and communications ports. d. List connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. e. Include type of cable connected to each terminal port. f. Identify specific field devices wired to each terminal including identification of each field device and application.
g. Clearly differentiate between existing controllers and new controllers. h. Indicate source (electrical panel ID) of 120V power to each panel to which 120V power is connected.
i. Indicate method of connecting controller to equipment supplied by others and to existing communications networks.

4. Submit floor plans that indicate the following:
a. Location of all new BAS distributed controllers and control panels. b. Routing of all new building level network communications wiring not located in mechanical and electrical rooms.
c. Routing of wiring to controllers, sensors, and control points not located in mechanical and electrical rooms.
d. Location of building system connection to Owner’s campus wide data network.

5. Submit methods and materials used to integrate into existing networks.

6. All control drawings and schematics shall be generated using AutoCAD software or equivalent. All project drawings shall be supplied to the Owner in a format as desired by the Owner upon project completion.

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-4
F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions for all manufactured components.

G. Manufacturer’s qualification statement.

H. Installer’s qualification statement.

I. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors.

1. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.

2. Include submittals data in final "Record Documents" form.

3. All additions or changes to the BAS during the course of construction shall be reflected upon the drawings and submitted to the Engineer before project close-out.

J. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists: Submit completed versions of all reports and checklists, along with all trend logs, used to meet the requirements of Part 3, Startup and Demonstration.

K. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Include maintenance data and recommended spare parts list for digital control equipment and control components.

2. Include trouble-shooting maintenance guides.

3. Include interconnection wiring diagrams showing complete field installed systems with identified and numbered system components and devices.

4. Include keyboard illustrations and step -by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.

5. Include insp ection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances.

6. Include a maintenance manual which contains the information listed above, product data, shop drawings, final software code for sequences of operation and maintenan ce data in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

7. Include logbook for documentation of software updates and patches applied BAS for the time period included in the software licensing agreement.

8. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of insta lling contractors and service representatives for equipment and control systems.

L. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner’s name and registered with manufacturer.

M. Maintenance Materials:

1. Refer to Division 01 for additional provisions.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

7. Submit system identification nomenclature.
a. Nomenclature shall be consistent throughout the network and consistent with any existing networks that are integrated. If not defined, nomenclature shall be similar to the point names shown on the drawings.

8. Indicate system graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) and operator notations.
a. Submit example graphic visualizations and screenshots for the BAS. b. Font size and type shall be manufacturer standard.

9. Indicate description and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software.

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-5
C. BACnet devices used in the BAS shall be BTL listed according to its device profile.

D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of the type specified and with minimum documented experience as follows:

1. All personnel of the BAS Contractor shall have a minimum of three years of experience within their appropriate trades.

2. All subcontractors utilized by the BAS Contractor shall have a minimum of five years experience within their appropriate trades.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Division 01 for additional project warranty requirements.

B. Labor and materials for the BAS specified shall be warranted free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of 1 year after Substantial Completion and system acceptance.

C. BAS failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired , or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to the Owner.

D. All work shall have a single warranty date, even when the Owner has received beneficial use due to an early system start -up. If the work specified is split into multiple contracts o r a multi-phase contract, then each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start data and period.

E. Provide updates to operator workstation software, project -specific software, graphic software, database software, and firmware that resolve Contract or-identified software deficiencies at no charge during warranty period. If available, Owner can purchase in -warranty service agreement to receive upgrades for functional enhancements associated with above-mentioned items. Do not install updates or upgrades without Owner’s written authorization.

F. rovide five year manufacturer’s warranty for field programmable micro-processor based units.

G. Special warranty on instrumentation:

1. All instrumentation shall be covered by manufacturer’s transferable one -year “No Fault” warranty. If manufacturer warranty is not available, the BAS installer shall provide the same.

1.9 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS
A. Prior to delivery of software, the Owner and the party providing the software will enter into a software license agreement with provisions for the following:

1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications.

2. Limiting copying.

3. Preserving confidentiality.

4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party.

B. Software provider shall provide software updates and patches to the BAS as part of the software licensing agreement as the updates and patches are released. If any security vulnerabilities are discovered by the provider, the provider shall notify the client within five business days.

C. Ownership of Proprietary Material: Project -specific software and documentation shall become Owner’s property upon project completion. This includes, but is not limited to the followin g:

1. Graphics.

2. Record drawings.

3. Database.

4. Application programming code.

5. Documentation.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Niagara Framework Products: Products and stations supplied from the list of acceptable manufacturers in the following table shall be based on the latest version of the Niagara Framework and be supplied with an open NiCS license that shall not limit access or connectivity to the Niagara station in any way. Open access to the station shall allow any brand compatibility in and out of the station and tool compatibility in and out of the station.

1. Johnson Controls, Inc.: Facility Explorer.

B. The above list of manufacturers applies to operator workstation software, controller software, the custom application programming language, building controllers, custom application controllers, and application specific controllers. All other products spec ified under Division 23 Section “Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC” need not be manufactured by the above manufacturers.

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General:

1. The scope of work includes but is not limited to the following:
a. Disconnect, remove existing VAV terminal unit controls and associated wiring. b. New VAV terminal unit controls including new heating water control val ves, discharge air sensors and space tempe rature/relative humidity /carbon dioxide/occupancy sensors.
c. New BACnet-MS/TP network connecting VAV terminal unit controllers to existing Facility Explorer FX80 supervisory controller.
d. New power supply wiring.
e. FX-Server software and graphics updates to incorporate new VAV terminal unit controls.

2. The BAS shall consist of all necessary hardware and software to perform the control sequences of operation as called for in the Specifications and Drawings. Contractor shall install and commission all necessary devices to ensure a reliable and stable network.

3. System design is bases on a distributed system of fully intelligent, stand-alone controllers, operating in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment on token passing network, with central and remote hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.

4. Include computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, control units, local area networks (LAN), sensors, control devices, actuators.

5. Communication between building controller(s) and application specific and custom application controllers:
a. MS/TP.

1.2 CONTROLLERS
B. Application Specific Controllers

1. General:
a. Input Power Requirements: 24Vac.
b. Not fully user programmable, microprocessor based controllers dedicated to control specific equipment.
c. Customized for operation within the confines of equipment served. d. Provide sufficient memory to support controller’s operating system, database, and programming requirements.
e. Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol. 1) Each ASC shall be capable of stand -alone operation and shall continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-7
f. Monitor and assume predetermined failure m ode and generate alarm notification upon detection of abnormal operation.

2. Communication:
a. Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's terminal or hand held device with compatible protocol.

3. Anticipated Environmental Ambient Conditions:
a. Outdoors and/or in Wet Ambient Conditions:
1) Mount within NEMA 4X waterproof enclosures.
2) Rated for operation at 40 to 150 degrees F.
b. Conditioned Space:
1) Mount within NEMA 1 dustproof enclosures.
2) Rated for operation at 32 to 120 degrees F and 95 percent RH, non - condensing.

4. Provisions for Serviceability:
a. Diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. b. Make all wiring connections to field removable, modular terminal strips, or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

5. Memory. In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming information for a minimum of 72 hours.

6. Power and Noise Immunity:
a. Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating. b. Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage. c. Upon restoration of normal power, the controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention.
d. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W. at 3 feet.

7. Surge and Transient Protection:
a. Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well as all field point terminations, to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard C62.41.2.
b. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow all signa l wiring to be run in the same conduit as high voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical code.

C. Input/Output Interface

1. Hardwired inputs and outputs shall tie into the BAS through building, custom application, or application specific controllers.

2. All Input/Output Points:
a. Protect controller from damage resulting from any point short-circuiting or grounding and from voltage up to 24 volts of any duration.
b. Provide universal type for building and custom application controllers where input or output is software designated as either binary or analog type with appropriate properties.
c. Universal-type inputs or outputs configurable between binary and analog are acceptable.

3. Binary Inputs:
a. Allow monitoring of On/Off signals from remote devices. b. Provide wetting current of 12 mA minimum, compatible with commonly available control devices and protected against the effects of contact bounce and noise. c. Sense dry contact closure with power provided only by the controller.

4. Analog Inputs:
a. Allow for monitoring of low voltage 0 to 10 V dc, 4 to 20 mA current, or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD).
b. Compatible with and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.

5. Binary Outputs:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-8
a. Used for On/Off operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse width modulation control.
b. Outputs provided with three position (On/Off/Auto) override switches. c. Status lights for building and custom application controllers to be selectable for normally open or normally closed operation.

6. Analog Outputs:
a. Monitoring signal provides a 0 to 10 Vdc or a 4 to 20 mA output signal for end device control.
b. Provide status lights and two position (AUTO/MANUAL) swi tch for building and custom application controllers with manually adjustable potentiometer for manual override on building and custom application controllers. c. Drift to not exceed 0.4 percent of range per year.

7. Tri State Outputs:
a. Coordinate two binary outpu ts to control three point, floating type, electronic actuators without feedback.
b. Limit the use of three point, floating devices to the following zone and terminal unit control applications:
1) VAV terminal units.
c. Control algorithms shall run the zone actuator to one end of its stroke once every 24 hours for verification of operator tracking.

2.3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL POWER AND LOW VOLTAGE WIRING
A. Power Wiring: Copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways shall be as specified in the applicable section of Division 26.

B. Power and Communication Wiring Transient Protection:

1. Comply with IEEE C62.41.2.

2. Communications trunk wiring shall be protected with a transient surge protection device providing the minimal protection required.

3. Communication circuitr y, input/output circuitry, and communication unit shall provide protection against a 1000 volt, 3 amp transient signal, directly applied to the communication or input/output terminations.
a. For s ystems not compl ying with this requirement , provide equivalent protection external to the automatic temperature control system controller. Protection shall be provided for the individual communications and input/output terminations for each automatic temperature control system controller.
b. Submittal documentation shall clearly define how this requirement will be met and how the external protection will not affect the performance of the controllers.

C. Power Supplies:

1. Provide UL listed control transformers with Class 2 current limiting type or over -current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service as required by the NEC.

2. Limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity.

3. Match DC power supply to current output and voltage requirements.

4. Supplies shall be full wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.

5. Regulation to be 1 percent combined line and load with 100 microsecond response time for 50 percent load changes.

6. Provide over -voltage and over -current protection to withst and a 150 percent current overload for 3 seconds minimum without trip-out or failure.

7. Operational Ambient Conditions: 32 to 120 degrees F.

8. EM/RF meets FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MIL -STD 810 for shock and vibration.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-9

9. Line voltage units UL recognized and CSA approved.

D. Power Line Filtering:

1. Provide external or internal transient voltage and surge suppression component for all workstations and controllers.

2. Minimum surge protection attributes:
a. Dielectric strength of 1000 volts minimum.
b. Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less.
c. Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater. d. Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40 to 100 Hz.

E. Input/Output Control Wiring

1. Control wiring shall be sized to accommodate the voltage drop associated with the distance between the control device and the controller. Minimum size shall be as specified herein.

2. In all communication conduits, provide one spare twisted pair to be installed, tagged and labeled at each end.

3. Control wiring not installed in conduit shall be UL rated for plenum installation.

4. RTD wiring shall be three-wire or four-wire twisted, shielded, minimum number 22 gauge.

5. Other analog inputs shall be a minimum of number 22 gauge, twisted, shielded.

6. Binary control function wiring shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge.

7. Analog output control functions shall be a minimum of number 22 gauge, twisted, shielded.

8. Binary input wiring shall be a minimum of number 22 gauge, twisted, shielded.

9. Thermistors shall be equipped with the manufacturer’s calibrated lead wiring.

10. 120V control wiring shall be #14 THHN in 3/4 inch conduit. Provide 20% fill extra wire in each conduit.

F. Splices: Splices in shielded cables shall consist of terminations and the use of shielded cable couplers that maintain the integrity of the shielding.

G. Conduit and Fittings

1. Conduit for Control Wiring, Control Cable and Transmission Cable: EMT with compression fittings, cold rolled steel, zinc coated or zinc-coated rigid steel with threaded connections.

2. Outlet Boxes (Dry Location): Sheradized or galvanized drawn steel suited to each application, in general, four inches square or octagon with suitable raised cove r.

3. Outlet Boxes (Exposed to Weather): Threaded hub cast aluminum or iron boxes with gasket device plate.

4. Pull and Junction Boxes: Size according to number, size, and position of entering raceway as required by National Electrical Codes. Enclosure type shall be suited to location.

2.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. General:

1. Provide all necessary system software to form a complete operating system for all operator interface devices.

2. System software shall integrate with all controller software and allow management of software applications at the operator workstation.

3. System software display language: English.

B. Device Profile: BACnet devices shall Conform to the following device profiles as specified in ASHRAE/ANSI 135 BACnet Annex L:

1. Application Specific Controller: BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).

C. Software Programming:

1. Provide programming for the system and adhere to the sequences of operation provided.

Provide actions for all possible situations. All other system programming necessary for the operation of the system shall be provided by the Contractor. Imbed into the control program sufficient comment statements to clearly describe each section of the program. The

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-10
comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequences of operation.

Provide text -based, graphic -based, and paramet er-based programming where appropriate.

D. System Graphics:

1. Functionality: Update the existing system gr aphics incorporating new VAV terminal units matching the graphics of the existing system. shall be capable of including point data from multiple ASC’s.

2. Include at least one graphic for each of the following:
a. Each piece of equipment.
b. Occupied zone.
c. Update floor plan displays of the Ballroom.

3. Sequence of Operation Graphics:
a. Display the complete Sequence of Operation or include a link to a separate text file that contains the sequence of operation , as submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer with each system schematic view. The Sequence of Operation text shall be in a separate frame above, below, or to the side of the graphic as appropriate for the graphic size and content.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that systems are ready to receive work.

C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

D. Verify the integrity of control wiring, raceways, control panels, sensors, and control devices prior to reusing for the new work.

E. Verify wiring insulation is defect free and test wiring for continuity and ground faults.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Coordination:

1. The BAS Contractor shall execute his work in such a manner as to cause the minimum interference to the operation of the building.

2. Cooperate with other contractors performing work on this project as necessary to achieve a complete and coordinated installation. Each Contractor shall consult the Drawings and Specifications for all trades to determine the nature and extent of others work.

A. General Workmanship:

1. Install equipment, piping, and wiring/raceway parallel to building lines wherever possible.

2. Install all equipment in readily accessible locations.

3. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.

4. All installations shall comply with industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.

3. Control wiring routed in wall cavities shall be installed in conduit.

4. Install software in control units and in operator work station. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation.

C. Controllers:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-11

1. Application specific controllers may be used where factory programming is capable of executing all control functions specified in the sequences of opera tion. Contractor shall add supplemental controllers, devices, and programming as required to execute the specified control function if the ASC cannot.

D. Wiring:

1. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with national and local electrical codes.

5. Wire all safety devices through both hand and auto positions of motor starting device to ensure 100 percent safety shut-off.

2. All NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL listed in approved raceway according to NEC and Division 26 requirements.

3. All low-voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. Low -voltage power circuits shall be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current limit.

6. Conceal all low voltage wiring in finished rooms.

7. Conceal all low voltage wiring in unfinished rooms below the elevation of the lights. Low voltage wiring above the elevation of the lights may be exposed.

8. Routing of low voltage wiring above working heights in equipment rooms and above accessible ceilings is acceptable subject to following criteria:
a. Wiring shall be plenum rated.
b. Do not lay wiring on ceiling tiles.

4. Where NEC Class 2 (current -limited) wires are in concealed and accessible locations, including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that cables are UL listed for the intended applications.

5. All wiring in mechanical, electrical, service rooms, or where subject to mechanical damage, shall be installed in raceway at levels below 10 feet.

6. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceway containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low-voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two wires (e.g., relays and transformers).

7. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it and neatly tied at 10 foot intervals.

8. Where plenum cables are used without raceway, they shall be supported from or anchored to structural members. Cables shall not be supported by or anchored to ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems.

9. All wire -to-device and wire -to-wire connections shall be made at a terminal block or terminal strip.

10. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.

11. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted between termination points.

12. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through floors and walls. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations.

13. Size of raceway and size and type of wire shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer’s recommendations and NEC requirements, except as noted elsewhere.

14. Include one pull string in each raceway 1 inch and larger.

15. Use coded conductors throughout with conductors of different colors.

16. Control and status relays shall be located in designated enclosures only. These enclosures include packaged equipment control panel enclosures unless they also contain Class 1 starters.

17. Conceal all raceways, except within mechanical , electrical, or service rooms. Install raceway to maintain a minimum clearance of 6 inches from high -temperature equipment (e.g., steam pipes or flues).

18. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to the structure and space d according to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes may not be hung on flexible duct strap or tie rods. Raceways may not be run on or attached to ductwork.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-12

19. Install insulated bushing on all raceway ends and openings to enclosures. Seal top end of all vertical raceways.

20. Terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and maintain updated (as -built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.

21. Terminate BAS sensor input wiring cable shield by taping back at the field device and connect shield to the grounded control panel chassis or sub-panel.

22. Terminate BAS comm bus cable shield between controllers per manufacturer recommendations.

23. Terminate management level/enterprise level network wiring cable shield by wrapping the drain wire around the foil shield and connecting the ground strip to the drain wire.

24. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 3 feet in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal raceway less than 1/2 inch electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways shall be used.

25. Raceway shall be rigidly installed, adequately supported, properly reamed at both ends, and left clean and free of obstructions. Raceway sections shall be joined with couplings (according to code). Terminations shall be made with fittings at boxes, and ends not terminating in boxes shall have bushings installed.

E. Communication Wiring:

1. Adhere to the items listed in the “Wiring” article in Part 3 of this specification in addition to the requirements listed below.

2. All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Follow manufacturer’s installation recommendations for all communication wiring.

3. Do not install communication wiring in raceway and enclosures containing Class 1 or other Class 2 wiring.

4. Do not instal l power wiring, in excess of 30 V ac RMS, in conduit with communications wiring. In cases where signal wiring is run in conduit with communication wiring, use separate twisted shielded pairs with the shields grounded in accordance with the manufacturer’s wiring practice.

5. Communication conduits shall not be installed closer than six feet from high power transformers or run parallel within six feet of electrical high power cables. Care shall be taken to route the cable as far from interference generating devices as possible.

6. Do not exceed m aximum pulling, tension, and bend radius for cable installation, as specified by the cable manufacturer during installation.

7. Verify the integrity of the entire network following the cable installation. Use appropriate test measures for each particular cable.

8. When a cable enters or exits a building, install a lightning arrestor between the lines and ground. Install the lightning arrestor according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

9. Ground (earth ground) all shields at one point only, to eliminate ground loops.

10. All runs of communications wiring shall be unspliced length when that length is commercially available.

11. Terminate shielded cable splices in accessible locations. Harness cables with cable ties.

12. Make all wire-to-device and wire-to-wire connections at a terminal block or terminal strip.

13. Label all communications wiring to indicate origination and destination data.

14. Install BACnet MS/TP communications wiring in accordance with ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 135
a. The network shall use shielded, twisted -pair cable with characteristic impedance between 100 and 120 ohms. Distributed capacitance between conductors shall be less than 100 pF per meter (30 pF per foot.)
b. The maximum length of an MS/TP segment shall be 4000 ft with AWG 22 or 24 cable. The use of greater distances and/or different wire gauges shall comply with the electrical specifications of EIA-485.
c. The maximum number of nodes per segment shall be 50. Additional nodes may be accommodated by the use of repeaters.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-13
d. An MS/TP EIA-485 network shall have no T connections.

F. Identification of Hardware and Wiring:

1. Label all wiring and cabling, including that within factory -fabricated panels, at each end within 2 inch of termination with the BAS address or termination number.

2. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served.

3. Identify control panels with minimum 1/2 inch letters on laminated plastic nameplates.

4. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Label all plug-in components such that removal of the component does not remove the label.

5. Identify room sensors related to terminal box or valves with nameplates.

6. Maintain m anufacturers’ namepl ates and UL or CSA labels visible and legible after equipment is installed.

7. Identifiers shall match record documents.

3.3 STARTUP AND DEMONSTRATION
A. Start and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start -up and commissioning prior to placing the BAS in permanent operation.

B. Contractor shall provide an on -site controls technician or programmer familiar with the project BAS installation and system programming to assist the Commissioning Agent as directed during all phases of system functional testing.

C. Coordinate with Owner the setup of logins, passwords, and security level access for individuals requiring access to the BAS.

D. BAS shall be set up and c hecked by factory trained technicians skilled in the setting and adjustment of the BAS equipment used in this project. Technicians shall be experienced in the type of HVAC systems associated with this project.

E. Verify that all control wiring is properly connected and free of all shorts and ground faults. Verify that terminations are tight.

F. Test each control device to ensure that it is operating properly and is calibrated to the appropriate operating requirements. Run each control device through its range o f operation and sequence.

Verify all normal positions are correct. Adjust and tune PID control constants to achieve proper system operation.

1. As each control input and output is checked, a log shall be completed showing the date, technician’s initials, and any corrective action taken or needed.

2. Any tests that fail to demonstrate the operation of the BAS shall be repeated at a later date.

The Contractor shall be responsible for any necessary repairs or revisions to the hardware or software to successfully complete all tests.

G. Test and verify control interfaces to other building systems integrated into the network.

H. Verify all alarms and interlocks.

1. Check each alarm separately by including an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm.

I. Document on system equipment schedules the final setting of controller PID constant settings, setpoints, manual reset values, maximum and minimum controller output, an d ratio and bias settings in units and terminology specific to the controller. Store documentation with operator workstation.

J. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner.

1. Prior to acceptance, the BAS shall undergo a series of performance tests to verify operation and compliance with this specification. These tests shall occur after the Contractor has completed the installation, started up the system, and performed his/her own tests.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23-14

2. The tests described in this section are to be performed in additio n to the tests that the Contractor performs as a necessary part of the installation, start -up, and debugging process.

3. The Contractor shall demonstrate actual field operation of each control and sensing point for all modes of operation including day, night, occupied and unoccupied, Any test equipment required to provide the proper operation shall be provided by and operated by the Contractor.

4. Demonstrate compliance with sequences of operation through all modes of operation.

5. Demonstrate complete operation of operator interface.

K. Acceptance:

1. All tests described in this specification shall have been performed to the satisfaction of the Owner prior to the acceptance of the BAS as meeting the requirements of completion. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be exempt from the completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Contractor and submitted for approval by the Owner. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty.

2. The BAS shall not be accepted until a ll forms and checklists completed as part of the demonstration are submitted and approved.

3.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Provide service and maintenance of energy management and control systems for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13-1
SECTION 23 21 13 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hydronic system requirements.

B. Hydronic piping materials.

C. Hydronic piping fittings.

D. Hydronic piping joining materials.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 01 submittal procedures.

B. Reference Division 23 Section, “Basic Piping Materials and Methods” for additional submittal requirements.

C. Reports as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Division 23 Section 230510, “Basic Piping Materials and Methods.” A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this Section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in th is Section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Division 23 Section 230510, “Basic Piping Materials and Methods.” PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 HYDRONIC PIPING MATERIALS
A. Carbon Steel Pipe:

1. NPS 2 inch and Smaller: ASTM A53 or A106, Type E electric-resistance welded or Type S seamless, Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.

B. Copper Tubing:

1. Drawn Temper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L.

2.2 HYDRONIC PIPING FITTINGS:

A. General: Fittings shall be of wall thickness, pressure rating, and material matching adjoining pipe.

B. Reference Division 23 Section “Basic Piping Materials and Methods” for basic piping materials and fittings.

C. Threaded:

1. All threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13-2

2. Cast-Iron: ASME B16.4, standard pattern.

2.3 HYDRONIC PIPING JOINING MATERIALS:

A. Reference Division 23 Section “Basic Piping Materials and Methods” for basic joining materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install piping to ASME B31.9 requirements.

C. Reference Division 23 Section “Basic Piping Materials and Methods” for general piping installation requirements.

3.2 PIPE APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Heating Hot Water Piping, Above Grade:

1. Acceptable Pipe Materials:
a. Carbon steel with threaded fittings for pipes 2 inch and smaller. b. Type L copper with soldered, brazed, or flanged fittings.

2. Fitting Pressure Class: Minimum rating of 150 psig.

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment using jointing system specified.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Provide long radius elbows with a minimum centerline radius of 1 -1/2 times the pipe diameter.

Short radius elbows with a minimum centerli ne radius of 1 times the pipe diameter may be used only where space does not permit the long radius elbows.

B. Install piping at a uniform grade of 1 inch in 40 feet upward in the direction of flow.

C. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with the level side up.

D. Install branch connections to mains using Tee fittings in main with take -off out the top or side of the main unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Up-feed risers shall have take-off out the top of the main line.

1. Tee-drilling is prohibited as a means for connecting branch taps into any main.

3.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS APPLICATION
C. Comply with the requirements of Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”

1. Provide roll hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.

B. Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13-3
Nom. Pipe Steel Pipe Copper Tube Min. Rod
Size - In. Max. Span - Ft. Max. Span - Ft. Dia. - In.

Up to 3/4 7 5 3/8
1 7 6 3/8
1-1/4 7 7 3/8
1-1/2 9 8 3/8
2 10 8 1/2
C. Install a support within one foot of each change of direction.

3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Reference Division 23 Section, “Basic Piping Materials and Methods ” for basic pipe joint construction.

B. Where more than one pipe material is specified, provide joining fittings that are compatible with piping materials and ensure that the integrity of the system is not jeopardized.

C. Install non-conductive dielectric connections whenever joining dissimilar metals.

D. Pipe-to-Valve and Pipe-to-Equipment Connection: Install flanges or unions between piping and valves and equipment for servicing. Do not use direct welded, brazed, or soldered connections unless specifically called for in the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Preparation for Testing:

1. Prepare hydronic piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during the test.

3. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. If a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against the test pressure without damage to the valve.

4. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than 1/3 higher than the test pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of overpressure during the test.

B. Pressure Testing:

1. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium

2. Use vents installed at high points in the system to release trapped air while filling and prevent vacuum while draining the system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of the liquid.

3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low pressure filling lines are disconnected.

4. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the sys tem is

1.5 times the maximum system design pressure but not less than 100 psi. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix I of ASME B31.9, Code For Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping.

5. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 15 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leak s. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13-4

6. Provide test reports summarizing the test procedures and results of the tests.

C. Flushing:

1. After satisfactory pressure test is obtained, flush piping system using a minimum velocity of 4 FPS through all portions of the system.

2. Make all provisions required to isolate HVAC equipment, coils, control valves, automatic flow control valves, pressure independent control valves, and balance valves during flushing.

3. Provide temporary valves, connections, and bypasses where required.

4. Provide temporary pumps with temporary connections.

5. Continue flushing until discharge water shows no discoloration and strainers are no longer collecting dirt and other foreign materials.

6. Upon completion of flushing, drain all water from system at low points, and remove, clean, and replace strainers.

7. Open vents installed at high points in the system to release trapped air while filling and prevent vacuum while draining the system.

D. Fluid Testing: After filling the system as described under Paragraph “Startup”, perform the following fluid test procedures:

3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. After installation of entire system, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 232500 HVAC Water Treatment for additional requirements.

B. Cleaning Agent Concentration:

1. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval of Engineer.

C. Hot Water Heating Systems:

1. Circulate for 12 hours minimum.

2. Drain systems as quickly as possible.

3. Refill with clean water and circulate for 6 hours, then drain.

4. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.

D. Open vents installed at high points in the system to release trapped air while filling and prevent vacuum while draining the system.

E. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens.

F. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed.

Include disassembly of components as required.

G. Inspect valves for leaks after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Adjust or replace packing, as required, on valves with leaks.

Replace valve if leak persists.

3.9 STARTUP
A. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment. Refer to Division 23 Section “HVAC Water Treatment” for chemical treatment.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
23 21 16-1
SECTION 23 21 16 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Air vents.

B. Strainers.

C. Balancing valves.

D. Combination Piping Packages (Coil Kits).

E. Test plugs.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 Submittals and Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements.

B. Product Data : Include rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties and accessories, component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

1. Balancing Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing.

C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance manual.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Comply with ASME B31.9 "Building Servi ces Piping" for materials, products, and installation.

Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.

C. Hydronic specialties shall be manufactured in plants located in the United States or certified to meet the specified ASTM and ANSI standards.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary co vers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
23 21 16-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR VENTS
A. Manufacturers:

1. American Wheatley.

2. Amtrol, Inc.

3. Armstrong International.

4. Bell & Gossett; Xylem.

5. John Wood Company.

6. Nexus Valves.

7. Spirax Sarco.

8. Taco, Inc.

B. Manual Type: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; working pressure as defined by the ANSI fitting class of the system , 225 deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; and having 1/8 inch discharge and inlet connections.

2.2 STRAINERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. American Wheatley.

2. Armstrong International.

3. Hoffman Specialty; Xylem.

4. Keckley.

5. Metraflex Co.

6. Mueller Steam Specialties.

7. Spirax Sarco.

8. Nexus Valve.

9. Watts Water Technologies.

B. Pressure Rating: Rated for working pressure as defined by the ANSI fitting class of the system .

C. Size 2 inch and Smaller:

1. Body: Bronze, ASTM B62.

2. Ends: Threaded.

3. Cover: Screwed.

4. Screen: Type 304 stainless steel with mesh rating based on the Strainer Schedule in Part

3. 2.3 BALANCING VALVES
A. Manufacturers:

1. American Wheatley.

2. Armstrong Fluid Technology.

3. Bell & Gossett; Xylem.

4. Caleffi.

5. Griswold Controls.

6. Hays Fluid Controls.

7. IMI Hydronic Engineering.

8. Nexus Valve.

9. Nibco Inc.

10. Nutech Valves

11. Oventrop.

12. Pro Hydronic Specialties.

13. Taco, Inc.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
23 21 16-3

14. Victaulic Company of America.

B. Construction: Provide balancing valve with fixed orifice flow balancing, flow measurement, and shut-off capabilities, memory stops, and minimum of two differential pressure metering ports.

1. Quarter Turn: Provide ball or butterfly quarter turn st yle for measurement use in variable flow applications.

2. Full Turn: Provide plug or globe, full or multiple turn style for balancing use in constant flow applications.

3. Size 2 inch and Smaller: Bronze or brass body, threaded connections.

4. Pressure Rating: Minimum working pressure as defined by the ANSI fitting class of the system.

5. Maximum operating temperature: 250 degrees F.

C. Accessories: Valve shall include integral pointer and calibrated scale to register degree of valve opening, with position indication readout for repeatable regulation and control.

2.4 COMBINATION PIPING PACKAGES (COIL KITS)
A. Combination piping packages are allowed in lieu of individual components specified for hydronic coils and devices containing hydronic coils.

B. Components shall be same size as piping serving the unit as shown on the drawings. Control valves do not need to be same size as pipi ng subject to the sizing requirements set forth in Division 23 “Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.” C. Package shall include the components and shall match layouts specified on the Drawings. Each component of the combination piping package shall m eet the specifications for the individual components being combined.

2.5 TEST PLUGS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Flow Design, Inc.

2. MG Piping Products Co.

3. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.

4. Sisco, A Spedco, Inc. Co.

5. Watts Regulator.

B. Test Plug: 1/2 inch nickel -plated brass fit ting, rated for 500 psig, extension for insulation, and threaded cap with retention chain for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe.

C. Core Material:

1. Neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F.

2. Nordel core for temperatures up to 350 degrees F.

3. Viton core for temperatures up to 400 degrees F.
a.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HYDRONIC SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A. Reference Division 23 Section “General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping” for g eneral duty valve applications.

B. Air Vents:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
23 21 16-4

1. Manual Type: High points in the system outside of mechanical rooms, at heat transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

C. Strainers: Inlet of each pressure reducing valve, pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Do not install strainers on the inlet of pumps serving open loop condenser water systems.

D. Balancing Valves:

1. Variable Volume Pumping Systems: Where shown on the drawings, sized for the smaller of the pipe size or to have a minimum pressure drop of 1 psig at the design flow rate.

3.2 STRAINER SCHEDULE
A. Acceptable strainer types based on fluid and pipe size:

1. Hydronic in Pipes Smaller than 4 inch: Y-Type.

B. Screen Mesh Rating Based on Application:

1. General Piping:
a. Pipe size 4 inch and smaller: 0.062 inches (12 mesh).

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Reference Division 23 Section “Basic Piping Materials and Methods” for general piping installation requirements.

3.4 STARTUP
A. Reference Division 23 Section Hydronic Piping for general startup requirements.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HVAC WATER TREATMENT
23 25 00-1
SECTION 23 25 00 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Chemicals and test equipment.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASHRAE Guideline 12 , Managing the Risk of Legionellosis Associated with Building Water Systems.

B. ASHRAE Standard 188, Legionellosis: Risk Management for Building Water Systems.

C. FM (AG) – FM Approval Guide.

D. ITS (DIR) – Directory of Listed products.

E. UL (DIR) – Online Certifications Directory.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 01 submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit product cutsheets, materials, accessories, and chemicals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. Company shall have local representatives with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the chemical treatment manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of chemical treatment equipment required for this Project.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results f or compliance with performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. General: The following manufacturers of water treatment systems are acceptable. Manufacturers shall provide chemical feed equipment that meet the requirements specified herein.

1. Chem-Aqua, Inc.

2. Owner approved equal.

2.2 CHEMICALS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
A. General: Furnish chemicals of type and quantity as recommended by water -treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment.

B. System Cleaner:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HVAC WATER TREATMENT
23 25 00-2

1. Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products.

2. For closed systems, provide nonoxidizing biocide treatment if needed to meet biological parameters from water test performed after system is cleaned..

C. Closed System Treatment (Water):

1. Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust Ph.

2. Corrosion inhibitors.

3. Conductivity enhancers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Base chemical treatment performance requirements on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Coordinate the use of oxidizing agents supplemented with non -oxidizers sequentially to ensure organisms do not become immune to treatment per ASHRAE Guideline 12-2000.

C. Except as otherwise indicated, provide water treatment system manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, and as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

D. Comply with applicable codes for addition of non -potable chemicals to building mechanical systems and to public sewage systems.

E. Perform work in accordance with local health department regulations.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of chemical treatment needed to maintain the water quality as specified.

B. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system.

C. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.

D. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT
A. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fluid Testing:

1. Coordinate with the testing requirements specified in Division 23 Section “Hydronic Piping”

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HVAC WATER TREATMENT
23 25 00-3

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

METAL DUCTS
23 31 13-1
SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1. Rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2 inches to plus 10 inches water gauge.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment," for labeling and identification of metal ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC," for materials and methods for wall penetrations and equipment pads.

3. Division 23 Section “Seismic Controls for Mechanical Systems,” for seismic controls.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Sealing Requirements Definitions: For the purposes of duct systems sealing requirements specified in this Section, the following definitions apply:

1. Seams: A seam is defined as joining of two longitudinally (in the direction of airflow) oriented edges of duct surface material occurring between two joints. All other duct surface connections made on the perimeter are deemed to be joints.

2. Joints: Joints include girth joints; branch and subbranch intersections; so-called duct collar tap-ins; fitting subsections; louver and air terminal connections to ducts; access door and access panel frames and jambs; duct, p lenum, and casing abutments to building structures.

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air moving and distribution equipment and other components of the air system. Changes or alterations to the layout or configuration of the duct system must be specifically approved in writing. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that the proposed layout will provide the original design results without increasing the system total pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for the following items:

1. Sealing Materials.

B. Shop drawings from duct fabrication shop, drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/4 inch equals 1 foot, on drawing sheets same size as the Contract Drawings, detailing:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.

2. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications, duct gauge and sizes in plan view. For exhaust ducts systems, indicate the classification of the materials handled as defined in this Section.

3. Fittings.

4. Reinforcing details and spacing.

5. Seam and joint construction details.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

METAL DUCTS
23 31 13-2

6. Terminal heating and cooling unit installations.

7. Location of manual balancing dampers.

8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, and duct attachment.

C. Record drawings including duct systems routing, fittings details, reinforcing, support, and installed accessories and devices, in accordance with Division 23 Section "General Mechanical Requirements" and Division 1.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): Provide ductwork systems in conformance with “HVAC Duct Constructi on Standards – Metal and Flexible,” latest edition.

B. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL): Comply with the UL standards listed within this section. Provide mastic and tapes that are listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181A and marked according to type.

1.6 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. Protect ductwork during shipping and storage from dirt, debris and moisture damage. Provide plastic covers over ends of ductwork during shipping, storage and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Sheet Metal, General: Provide sheet metal in thickness indicated (minimum 26 gauge), packaged and marked as specified in ASTM A 700.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653, Coating Designation G 90. Provide mill phosphatized or galvanealed finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view that is to be field painted. Provide bright galvanized finish for ductwork that is exposed to view and not field painted.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unles s otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel reinforcing where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. For aluminum and stainless steel ducts provide reinforcing of compatible materials.

2.2 SEALING MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General:

1. The term sealant used here is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature, but also includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics.

2. Duct tape shall not be used as a sealant on any ducts.

3. Sealants used on metal duct systems shall comply with VOC limits under VOC table classifications as “other” per SCAQMD Rule #1168.

4. Sealants shall be ASTM E84 or UL 723 listed with a flame spread index not more than 25 and a smoke-developed index not more than 50.

B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide, glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.

C. Tape Sealing System: Woven -fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with the tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

METAL DUCTS
23 31 13-3
D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, non-sag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying with FS TT-S-001657, Type I; formulated with a minimum of 70 percent solids.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Childers CP-140.
b. Duro Dyne SGD.
c. Fosters 32-14.
d. Approved equal.

E. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant , Non-Fibrated: UL 181 listed. Sealant shall be rated to ±15 inches w.g. Sealant shall have a service temperature of –25 to 200 F and be freeze/thaw stable through 5 cycles.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Childers CP-146.
b. Design Polymerics DP 1010.
c. Ductmate Proseal/Fiberseal.
d. Duro Dyne Duroseal.
e. Fosters 32-19
f. United Duct Sealer (Water Based).
g. Hardcast 601.

F. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

2.3 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet s teel, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Tables 2 -1 through 2-28, including their associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Fabricate rectangular ductwork of minimum 26 gauge sheet metal.

2. Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification.

3. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations.

B. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19 inches and larger and are 20 gauge or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Figure 2 -9, unless they are lined or are externally insulated.

2.4 RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS
A. Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," 2005 Edition, Figures 4-1 through 4 -8. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, provide prefabricated 45 degree, high efficiency, rectangular/round branch duct takeoff fittings with manual balancing damper , 3/8 inch square shaft, U-bolt, nylon bushings, locking quadrant, and 2 inch insulation build-out for branch duct connections and take -offs to individual diffusers, registers and grilles. 45 degree, high efficiency, rectangular/round branch duct takeoff fittings shall be Flexmaster STO with model BO3 damper or equal.

B. Provide radius elbows, turns, and offsets with a minimum centerline radius of 1-1/2 times the duct width. Where space does not permit full radius elbows, provide short radius elbows with a minimum of two continuous splitter vanes. Vanes shall be the entire length of the bend. The use

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

METAL DUCTS
23 31 13-4
of square throat, radius heel elbows is prohibited. Remove and replace all installed elbows of this type with an approved elbow at no additional cost to the owner.

C. Provide mitered elbows where space does not permit r adius elbows , where shown on the drawings, or at the option of the contractor with the engineer’s approval. The contractor shall obtain approval to substitute mitered elbows in lieu of radius elbows prior to fitting fabrication.

Mitered elbows less than 45 degrees shall not require turning vanes. Mitered elbows 45-degrees and greater shall have single thickness turning vanes of same material and gauge as ductwork , rigidly fastened with guide strips in ductwork. Vanes for mitered elbows shall be provided in all supply and exhaust ductwork and in return and outside air ductwork that has an air velocity exceeding 1000 fpm. Do not install vanes in grease ductwork. Refer to Section “Ductwork Accessories” for turning vane construction and mounting.

D. Provide full radius elbows for ductwork installed in noise critical spaces. Refer to Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for noise critical spaces. Where space does not permit the installation of radius elbows, provide mitered elbows with sound attenuat ing, acoustical turning vanes. Refer to Section “Ductwork Accessories” for acoustical turning vanes.

2.5 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: "Basic Round Diameter" as used in this article is the diameter of the size of round duct that has a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given sized of flat oval duct. Except where interrupted by fittings, provide round and flat oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet.

1. Fabricate round and flat oval ductwork of minimum 26 gauge sheet metal.

B. Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts using seam types identified in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Figure 3 -2, RL-1, RL-4, or RL-5 except where diameters exceed 72 inches. Sea m Types RL-2 or RL-3 may be used for ducts smaller than 72 inches in diameter if spot -welded on 1 -inch intervals. Fabricate ducts having diameters greater than 72 inches with longitudinal butt -welded seams. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Table 3 -5 through 3 -13 for galvanized steel gauges. For round duct with static pressure classification of 2 inches water gauge or lower, round supply ducts may be fabricated using snaplock seam types identified in SMACNA "HVAC Duct C onstruction Standards," 2005 Edition, Figure 3-2, RL-6A, RL-6B, RL-7 or RL-8.

C. Flat Oval Ducts: Fabricate flat oval supply ducts with standard spiral lockseams (without intermediate ribs) or with butt -welded longitudinal seams in gauges listed in SMACNA "H VAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Table 3-15.

2.6 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTINGS FABRICATION A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to conform to SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Figures 3 -5, 3 -6 and 3 -7 and with metal thickness specified for longitudinal seam straight duct.

B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material projecting from the body onto branch tap entrance.

C. Elbows: Unless elbow construction type is indicated, provide elbows meeting the following requirements:

1. Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate the bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows 1.5 times the elbow diameter. a. Elbows in Round Duct: Provide full radius elbows.
b. Elbows in Flat Oval Duct: Provide full radius elbows. Where space limits the installation of full radius elbows, short radius elbows with a minimum of two continuous splitter vanes shall be installed. Vane length shall be the entire length of the bend or 36 inches whichever is greater.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

METAL DUCTS
23 31 13-5
c. The use of square throat, radius heel elbows is prohibited. Remove and replace all installed elbows of this type with an approved elbow at no additional cost to the owner.
d. Provide full radius elbows for ductwork installed in noise critical spaces or where shown on the drawings. Refer to Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for noise critical spaces.

2. Round Elbows - 8 Inches and Smaller: Die -formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle configurations or 1/2 -inch-diameter (e.g. 3 -1/2- and 4 -1/2-inch) elbows with gored construction.

3. Round Elbows - 9 Through 14 Inches: Gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees, except where space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle configurations or 1/2 -inch-diameter (e.g. 9 -1/2- and 10-1/2-inch) elbows with gored construction.

4. Round Elbows - Larger Than 14 Inches and All Flat Oval Elbows: Gored elbows, except where space restrictions require a mitered elbow.

5. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes Through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 20 gauge with 2-piece welded construction.

6. Round Gored Elbows Gauges: Same as for non-elbow fittings specified above.

7. Flat Oval Elbows Gauges: Same as longitudinal seam flat oval duct.

8. Pleated Elbows Sizes Through 14 Inches and Pressures Through 10 Inches: 26 gauge.

2.7 FACTORY-MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hercules Industries.

2. Lewis & Lambert.

3. Lindab Safe.

4. Linx Industries, Inc.

5. Semco.

6. Approved equal.

B. General: At the Contractor’s option, factory-manufactured ductwork can be provided instead of fabricated ductwork for round and oval ductwork. The round duct system shall consist of fittings that are factory fitted with a sealing gasket and spiral duct which, when installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, will seal the duct joints without the use of duct sealer.

C. Duct Construction

1. Unless otherwise noted, all duct and fittings shall be constructed from galvanized steel in accordance with SMACNA's Duct Construction Standards for +10” water gauge pressure with thickness as shown in the following tables:

Single Wall Round Duct:

Diameter Galvanized Galvanized
(Inches) Spiral Duct Fittings
3-14 28 24
15-24 26 24
26-42 24 22
42-60 22 20

2. Duct shall be calibrated to manufacturer's published dimensional tolerance standard.

3. All duct 14" diameter and larger shall be corrugated for added strength and rigidity.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

METAL DUCTS
23 31 13-6

4. Spiral seam slippage shall be prevented by means of a flat seam and a mechanically formed indentation evenly spaced along the spiral seam.

5. Ducts shall be constructed using spiral lock seam sheet metal construction.

6. Ductwork to be installed in exposed locations shall have the surface prepared in the factory for field painting.

D. Fittings:

1. All fitting ends for round duct and transitions and divided flow fittings smaller than 50” diameter that convert oval duct to round duct shall come factory equipped with a double lipped, U -profile, EPDM rubber gasket. Gasket shall be manufactured to gauge and flexibility so as to insure that system will meet all of the performance criteria set forth in the manufacturer's literature. Gasket shall be classified by Underwriter's Laboratories to conform to ASTM E84-91a and NFPA 90A flame spread and smoke devel oped ratings of 25/50.

2. All fittings shall be calibrated to manufacturer's published dimensional tolerance standard and associated spiral duct.

3. All fitting ends from 5" to 60" diameter shall have rolled over edges for added strength and rigidity.

4. All elbows from 5" to 12" diameter shall be 2 piece die stamped and continuously stitch welded. All elbows 14" diameter and larger shall be standing seam gorelock construction and internally sealed.

5. The radius of all 90  and 45  elbows shall be 1.5 times the elb ow diameter, unless otherwise noted on the contract documents to be 1.0. The radius of all 15 , 30 and 60 elbows shall be 1.0 times the elbow diameter.

6. All fittings that are of either spot welded or button punched construction shall be internally sealed. When contract documents require divided flow fittings, only full body fittings will be accepted. The use of duct taps is unacceptable except for retrofit installations.

7. All volume dampers shall be Lindab Safe type DRU, DSU or DTU or approved equal.

Damper shall be fitting sized to slip into spiral duct. Damper shall have the following features:
a. Locking quadrant with blade position indicator.
b. 2" sheet metal insulation stand-off.
c. Integral shaft/blade assembly.
d. Shaft mounted, load bearing bushings.
e. Gasketed shaft penetrations to minimize leakage.

2.8 SNAP-LOCK DUCT SYSTEM
A. General: At Contractor’s option, snap-lock round ductwork can be provided instead of fabricated ductwork for round ductwork up to 14” in diameter in air systems with pressures between negative 1” and positive 2” w.c..

B. Duct Construction:

1. Material:
a. Galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653 and A924 with G-60 galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A653 and ASTM A90.

2. Duct shall be minimum 26 gauge. Duct shall be self -locking and incorporate a factory applied gasket in the longitudinal seam and the female end of the traverse joint to provide a system that meets SMACNA Seal Class A.

3. Fittings: Minimum 26 gauge. All high-efficiency take-offs, conicals, and collars shall have a factory applied gasket along all rivets, co -latches, and flanges. Dampered fittings shall have low leakage hardware with closed-end bearings.

C. Gaskets: Butyl and EPDM rubber that meets flame spread index of 25 and smoke spread in dex of 50 according to ASTM E84.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

METAL DUCTS
23 31 13-7
D. Manufacturers:

1. Ductmate GreenSeam.

2. Approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT MATERIAL APPLICATION
A. All ducts shall be galvanized steel.

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system except factory - manufactured ductwork for the specific duct pressure classification indicated. For fac tory- manufactured ductwork, refer to Paragraph “Factory-Manufactured Ductwork”.

1. Primary Supply Air Ducts (upstream of terminal boxes): 4 inches water gauge.

2. Secondary Supply Air Ducts (downstream of terminal boxes): 2 inches water gauge C. Install ducts with the fewest possible joints.

D. Seal duct joints with the appropriate sealing material.

E. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.

F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at connections kept to a minimum.

G. Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.

H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

I. Cover ducts openings during construction with duct caps or three-mil plastic to protect inside of (installed and delivered) ductwork from exposure to dust, dirt, paint and moisture . Do not use duct tape on ducts that will be exposed or painted.

J. Provide clearance of 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, plus allowance for insulation thickness, if any.

K. Install insulated ducts with 1-inch clearance outside of insulation.

L. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown.

M. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.

N. Acoustical Barrier Penetrations: Where a duct pass es through a wall, ceiling or floor slab of a noise critical space, provide a clear annular space of 1 -inch between the duct and the structure.

Refer to Section “ Common Work Results for HVAC ” for noise critical spaces. The Contractor shall check the clearance and, if clearance is acceptable, shall install the duct and pack the voids full depth with mineral fiber batt insulation. Contractor shall caulk both ends with a non -aging, non-hardening sealant backed by a polyethylene foam rod or permanently flexi ble firestop material. Where there is insufficient clearance space, Contractor shall place a short stub duct in the wall, pack and caulk around it and then attach the inlet and outlet ducts to each end.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

METAL DUCTS
23 31 13-8

3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal duct with support systems indicated in Chapter 5 of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", 2005 Edition.

B. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection.

C. Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 1/4 of the failure (proof test) load but are not limited to the specific methods indicated. Hangers and supports shall be fastened to building joists or beams. Do not attach hangers and supports to the above floor slab or roof with sheet metal screws.

3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Figures 4-5 and 4-6.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Remove temporary protection devices over ductwork prior to starting equipment and turning the system over to the owner.

B. If permanent HVAC equipment is used during the construction period, provide temporary filters at all openings in the ductwork and at inside equipment to protect the system from dust, dirt, paint, and moisture. Replace and maintain filters when needed, but not less than every month. On the day of substantial completion, clean the duct system and provide a new set of filters in the HVAC unit.

1. Refer to Division 23 Section 234100 Particulate Air Filtration for filter requirements.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and balancing procedures to achieve required air flow. Refer to Division 23 Section "TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC" for requirements and procedures for adjusting and balancing air systems.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00-1
SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this Section.

B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following:

1. Dampers.
a. Low pressure manual dampers.

2. Turning vanes.

3. Duct hardware.

4. Flexible ductwork.

5. Metal duct connectors.

6. Flexible duct connectors.

C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories; not work of this Section.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", 2005 Edition.

2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.

3. UL Compliance:
a. Construct flexible ductwork in compliance with UL Standard 181 “Factory -Made Air Ducts and Connections”.
b. Duct tape shall be labeled in accordance with UL Standard 181B and marked 181B- FX.
c. Duct clamps shall be labeled in accordance with UL St andard 181B and marked 181B-C.

4. ASTM Compliance: Products shall have flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke - developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 “Surface Burning Characteristics” (NFPA 255) method.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory including dimensions, capacities and materials of construction; and installation instructions.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 DAMPERS
A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multi -blade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

1. Material: Galvanized steel for standard air systems, aluminum for wet or natatorium environments and stainless steel for corrosive environments.

2. Construction: Bearings shall be corrosion resistant, molded synthetic and axles shall positively lock into the damper blade. Extended shafts and standoff bracket for insulation clearance shall be metal material. Provide with locking quadrant.

3. Blade Seals: Where dampers are used for shutoff duty, provide Neoprene seals for round dampers and silicone for rectangular dampers.

4. Dampers shall be Greenheck Model MBD Series, or approved equal.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the following:

1. Air Balance, Inc.

2. Arrow United Industries.

3. Cesco

4. Greenheck

5. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.

6. Nailor Industries, Inc.

7. Pottorff

8. Ruskin Mfg. Co.

9. TAMCO

10. Vent Products

2.2 TURNING VANES
A. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes and runners fabricated from galvanized sheet metal, lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653, minimum Coating Designation G 60, of the same gauge thickness or greater as the ductwork in which they are installed. Vanes shall be rigidly fastened with guide strips to minimize noise and vibration. Vanes in ductwork over 30" deep shall be installed in multiple sections with vanes not over 30" long and shall be rigidly fastened. Turning vanes shall be constructed per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible – 2005 Edition, Figure 4-3 and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide turning vanes of one of the following:

1. Aero Dyne Co.

2. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America.

3. Ductmate Industries.

4. Duro Dyne Corp.

5. Elgen Manufacturing Co., Inc.

6. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co.

7. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.

8. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

2.3 DUCT HARDWARE
A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following:

1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00-3

2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the following:

1. Ductmate Industries.

2. Elgen Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3. Ventfabrics, Inc.

4. Young Regulator Co.

2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT.

A. Construction: Provide flexible ductwork conforming to UL 181-Class I, NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and as follows. Duct types of manufacturers are indicated for reference in regards to required quality of construction and materials. Flexible duct shall have fire retardant polyethylene or reinforced metalized protective vapor barrier as follows:

1. Low pressure (duct pressure class up to and including 2” w.g.) and medium pressure (duct pressure class greater than 2” up to and including 6” w.g.) a. Fire retardant polyethylene vapor barrier
1) ATCO 80 Series
2) Flexmaster Type 5B
3) JPL Type PR Series
4) Thermaflex Type G-KM
b. Reinforced metalized vapor barrier
1) ATCO 30 Series
2) Flexmaster Type 5M
3) JPL Type MHP Series
4) Thermaflex Type M-KE

2. High pressure (duct pressure class over 6” w.g.)
a. Fire retardant polyethylene vapor barrier
1) Flexmaster Type 3B
b. Reinforced metalized vapor barrier
1) Flexmaster Type 3M
2) Thermaflex Type M-KC

3. Flexible du ctwork shall have CPE liner with steel wire helix mechanically locked or permanently bonded to the liner.

4. Provide acoustical, fiberglass insulated duct with minimum R-value of R-6.0.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide flexible ductwork of one of the following:

1. ATCO Rubber Products.

2. Flexmaster.

3. JPL (J.P. Lamborn Co)

4. Thermaflex.

2.5 METAL DUCT CONNECTORS
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, corners, cleats, gaskets, and components. Material, gauge, and shape shall match the connecting ductwork.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct connectors by one of the following or approved equal:

1. Ductmate Industries.

2. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00-4

2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS
A. Fabric Material: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics compliant with NFPA 701.

1. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip minimum 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of minimum 24 gauge galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 -inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

2. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric coated with neoprene. a. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.
b. Minimum Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. c. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Provide balancing dampers at branch takeoffs from main ducts. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, provide prefabricated 45 degree, high efficiency, rectangular/round branch duct takeoff fittings with manual balancing damper and locking quadrant for branch duct connections and take- offs to individual diffusers, registers and grilles.

C. Provide turning vanes, of same gauge as ductwork, rigidly fastened with guide strips in ductwork having an offset of 45 degrees or more. Vanes shall be provided in all supply and exhaust ductwork and in return and outside air ductwork that has an air velocity exceeding 1000 fpm. Do not install vanes in grease ductwork.

D. Install flexible duct in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. At a minimum, install two wraps of duct tape around the inner core connection and a metallic or non -metallic clamp over the tape and two wraps of duct tape or a clamp over the outer jacket.

1. Flexible duct runs shall not exceed 5 feet in length. Utilize the minimum length of duct to make the connections.

2. Flexible ductwork shall be installed straight as possible avoiding tight turns with a maximum of one 90 degree bend in any length. Install flexible duct fully extended minimizing compression.

3. Provide continuous length with no intermediate joints.

4. Support flexible duct from structure and not from ceiling tile, light fixtures or air terminals.

Support for maximum sag of 1/2-inch per foot.

5. Avoid incidental contact with metal fixtures, water lines, pipes, or conduit.

6. Support straps/saddles shall be minimum 1-1/4” wide. Use of wire hanging systems shall utilize strap and connect wire to strap.
a. Factory installed suspension systems are acceptable

7. Ductwork shall not be crimped against joist or truss members, pipes, conduits, etc.

8. The bend radius at the center line shall be equal to or greater than one duct diameter. a. Support bends approximately one duct diameter on both sides of bends.

9. Connections to ductwork and air devices shall have at least 1” overlap.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00-5
E. Provide rigid duct elbow or flexible elbow assembly where a 90 degree elbow is required at connection to air devices.

F. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action.

B. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division -23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC".

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 36 00-1
SECTION 23 36 00 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Extent of air terminals work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of air terminals specified in this section include the following:

1. Variable Air Volume Terminal Units
a. Shutoff Single Duct
b. Reheat

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:

1. ADC Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in accordance with ADC standards, and bear ADC Seal.

2. AHRI Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in accordance with AHRI 880 "Industry Standard for Air Terminals" and bear AHRI certification seal.

3. NFPA Compliance: Construct air termin als using acoustical and thermal insulations complying with NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".

4. UL/ETL Compliance: Air terminal units shall be UL or ETL listed as a complete assembly.

All electrical components shall be UL listed and installed in accordance with the National Electric Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including performance data for each size and type of air terminal furnished; certified sound power data for each unit; schedule showing drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished; and installation and start-up instructions.

B. Nameplate Data: Nameplate data shall be submitted in a timely manner so as to allow proper coordination with the Electrical Contractor. Submittals that do not have nameplate data will be rejected.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit man ufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for electric power and control components, clearly indicating required field electrical connections.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of air terminal; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and maintenance data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS
A. General: Provide factory -fabricated and tested a ir terminals as indicated, selected with performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on schedule.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 36 00-2
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air terminals of one of the following:

1. Carnes Co.

2. Environmental Technologies, Inc.

3. Johnson Controls, Inc.

4. Krueger Mfg. Co. (basis of design to match existing equipment)

5. Metalaire.

6. Nailor Industries, Inc.

7. Price Industries.

8. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.

C. Casings: Construct of galvanized sheet metal of minimum 22 gauge thickness or die-cast aluminum of minimum 20 gauge thickness.

1. Provide hanger brackets for attachment of supports.

2. Linings: Line inside surfaces of casings with lining material to provide acoustic performance, therm al insulation, and to prevent condensation on outside surfaces of casing. Provide minimum thickness of 1/2". Lining shall be closed cell foam and comply with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Insulation shall be 1 -1/2 lb. density. Insulation shall be equivalent to Titus Fibre-Free Liner.

3. Access: Provide removable panels in casings to permit access to air dampers and other parts requiring service, adjusting, or maintenance.
a. Provide airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.

4. Leakage: Construct casings such that when subjected to 0.5 -in w.g. pressure for low pressure units, and 3.0 -in w.g. pressure for high pressure units, total leakage does not exceed 2% of specified air flow capac ity with outlets sealed and inlets wide open.

Construct air dampers such that when subjected to 6.0 -in w.g. inlet pressure with damper closed, total leakage does not exceed 5% of specified air flow capacity.

D. Air Dampers: Construct of materials that cannot corrode, do not require lubrication, nor require periodic servicing. Provide maximum volume dampers that are calibrated in cfm, factory - adjusted, and marked for specified air capaciti es. Provide mechanism to vary air volume thru damper for minimum to maximum, in response from signal from thermostat.

E. Controls: Provide controls accurate to 1.5 degrees F and adjustable from 65 degrees F to 85 degrees F. Provide air flow measurement station at terminal unit inlet. Provide control type as indicated below.

1. Provide direct digital controls, compatible with direct digital control system specified in other Division 23 sections.

F. Identification: Provide label on each unit indicating Plan Number, cfm range, cfm factory-setting, and calibration curve (if required).

G. Heating Coils: Provide the following features as indicated on Drawings and schedule:

1. Hot Water Heating Coils: Provide heating coils constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins with galvanized steel casing.

H. Units shall incorporate a single point electrical connection for the entire unit. All electrical components shall be UL or ETL listed or recognized and installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All electrical components shall be mounted in a control box. The entire assembly shall be UL or ETL listed (cETL in Canada) and so labeled.

I. All sound data shall be compiled in an independent ADC certified laboratory and in accordance with the latest ve rsion of AHRI 880. All units shall be AHRI certified and bear the AHRI certification label.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 36 00-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air terminals, and duct connections to air terminals, are leak-tight.

B. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Clean the entire unit including cabinet interiors just prior to substantial completion to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-1
SECTION 26 00 10 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section and to all following sections within Division 26.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Division require s providing complete functioning systems, and each element thereof, as specified, indicated, or reasonably inferred, on the Drawings and in these Specifications, including every article, device, or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system’s functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the Work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, supplies, tools, equipment, transportation and utilities.

B. Division 26 of these Specifications, and Drawings numbered with prefixes E and DE generally describe these systems, bu t the scope of the electrical work includes all such work indicated in all of the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to: Instructions to Bidders; Proposal Form; General Conditions; Supplementary General Conditions; Architectural, Structural, Me chanical, Plumbing and Electrical Drawings and Specifications; and Addenda.

C. Drawings are graphic representations of the Work upon which the Contract is based. They show the materials and their relationship to one another, including sizes, shapes, location s, and connections. They also convey the scope of work, indicating the intended general arrangement of the equipment, fixtures, outlets and circuits without showing all of the exact details as to elevations, offsets, control lines, and other installation requirements. Use the Drawings as a guide when laying out the Work and to verify that materials and equipment will fit into the designated spaces, and which, when installed per manufacturers' requirements, will ensure a complete, coordinated, satisfactory and properly operating system.

D. Specifications define the qualitative requirements for products, materials, and workmanship upon which the Contract is based.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Whenever used in these Specifications or Drawings, the following terms shall have the indicated meanings:

1. Furnish: “To supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembling, installing, and similar operations.”

2. Install: “To perform all operations at the project site, including, but not limited to, and as required: unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, testing, commissioning, starting up and similar operations, complete, and ready for the intended use.”

3. Provide: “To furnish and install complete, and ready for the intended use.” When ‘furnish’, ‘install’, ‘perform’, or ’provide’ is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, “provide” is implied.

4. Furnished by Owner (or Owner-Furnished) or Furnished by Others: “An item furnished by the Owner or under other Divisions or Contracts, and installed under the requirements of this Division, complete, and ready for the intended use, including all i tems and services

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-2
incidental to the Work necessary for proper installation and operation. Include the installation under the warranty required by this Division.

5. Engineer: Where referenced in this Division, “Engineer” is the Engineer of Record and the Design Professional for the Work under this Division.
a. A Consultant to, and an authorized representative of, the Architect, as defined in the General and/or Supplementary Conditions. When used in this Division, it means increased involvement by, and ob ligations to, the Engineer, in addition to involvement by, and obligations to, the “Architect”.

6. Contract Administrator: Where referenced in this Division, “Contract Administrator ” is the primary liaison between the Owner and the Contractor. Specifically, for this project this is “the Architect”.

7. AHJ: The local code and/or inspection agency (Authority) Having Jurisdiction over the Work.

8. CLCATT: Certified Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Technician. A professional certified to perform acceptance tests and complete the documentation r equired for nonresidential acceptance tests as required by the California Building Energy Efficiency Standards.

Technician shall be certified by an authorized lighting controls acceptance test technician certification provider.

9. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory, as defined and listed by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 (e.g., UL, ETL, CSA, etc.), and acceptable to the Authority having Jurisdiction (AHJ) over this project. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories and standards listed are used only to re present the characteristics required and are not intended to restrict the use of other NRTLs that are acceptable to the AHJ, and standards that meet the specified criteria.

10. Substitution: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. Substitutions include Value Engineering proposals.
a. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailabili ty of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.
b. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

11. Value Engineering: A systematic method to improve the “value” of goods and services by using an examination of function. Value, as defined, is the ratio of function to cost. Value can therefore be increased by either improving the function or reducing the cost. The goal of VE is to achieve the desired function at the lowest overall cost consistent with required performance.

B. The terms "approved equal", “equivalent”, or "equal" are used synonymously and shall mean “accepted by or acceptable to the Engineer as equivalent to the item or manufacturer specified”.

The term "approved" shall mean labeled, listed, or both, by an NRTL, and acceptable to the AHJ over this project.

C. Manufacturers: The listing of specific manufacturers does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.

D. The following definitions apply to excavation operations:

1. Additional Excavation: Where excavation has reached indicated sub -grade elevations, if unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are reached. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification.

2. Sub-base: as used in this section refers to the compacted soil layer used in pavement systems between the sub-grade and the pavement base course material.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-3

3. Sub-grade: as used in this section refers to the compacted soil immediately below the slab or pavement system.

4. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated sub -grade elevations or dimensions without specific direction from the Contract Administrator.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Execute all work in accordance with, and comply at a min imum with, National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes, state and local building codes, and all other applicable codes and ordinances in force, governing the particular class of work involved, for performance, workmanship, equipment, and materials. Additionally, comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal departments affected by connection of services. Where conflicts between various codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations exist, comply with the most stringent. Wherever requirements of these Specifications, Drawings, or both, exceed those of the above items, the requirements of these Specifications, Drawings, or both, shall govern. Code compliance, at a minimum, is mandatory. Construe nothing in these Construction Document s as permitting work not in compliance, at a minimum, with these codes. Bring all conflicts observed between codes, ordinances, rules, regulations and these documents to the Contract Administrator’s and Engineer’s attention in sufficient time, prior to the opening of bids, to prepare the Supplementary Drawings and Specifications Addenda required to resolve the conflict.

B. If the conflict is not reported timely, prior to the opening of bids, resolve the conflict and provide the installation in accordance wit h the governing codes and to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator and Engineer, without additional compensation. Contractor will be held responsible for any violation of the law.

C. Obtain timely inspections by the constituted authorities having jurisdiction; and, upon final completion of the Work, obtain and deliver to the Owner executed final certificates of acceptance from these authorities having jurisdiction.

D. All material, manufacturing methods, handling, dimensions, methods of install ation, and test procedures shall conform to industry standards, acts, and codes, including, but not limited to the following, except where these Drawings and Specifications exceed them:

Sacramento City Code, Chapter 15 (Current Version).
2019 California Building Code, with local amendments.
2019 California Electrical Code, with local amendments. 2019 California Mechanical Code, with local amendments. 2019 California Plumbing Code, with local amendments.
2019 California Energy Code, with local amendments.
2019 California Fire Code, with local amendments.
2019 California Green Building Standards Code (Title 24, CALGreen), with local amendments
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASTM American Society of Testing Materials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
ICEA Insulated Conductors Engineers Association
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
NEC National Electrical Code, NFPA 70
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
NEMA National Electrical Manufactures' Association
NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-4
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
UL Underwriter's Laboratories
E. Comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal departments affected by connections of services.

F. Perform all ele ctrical work in compliance with applicable safety regulations, including OSHA regulations. All safety lights, guards, and warning signs required for the performance of the electrical work shall be provided by the Contractor.

G. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses and fees that are required by the governing authorities for the performance of the electrical work.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate with other divisions for electrical work included in them but not listed in Division 26 or indicated on electrical Drawings.

B. Visit the site and ascertain the conditions to be encountered in installing the Work under this Division, verify all dimensions and locations before purchasing equipment or commencing work, and make due provisions for same in the bid. Failure to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for omission, alteration, and incorrect or faulty installation of any of the Work under this Division or for additional compensation for any work covered by this Division.

C. Refer to Drawings and divisions of the other trades and to relevant equipment drawings and shop drawings to determine the extent of clear spaces. Make all offsets required to clear equipment, beams and other structural members, and to facilitate concealing cond uit in the manner anticipated in the design.

D. Provide materials with trim that will fit properly the types of ceiling, wall, or floor finishes actually installed.

E. Maintain an electrical foreman on the jobsite at all times to coordinate this work with other trades so that various components of the electrical systems is installed at the proper time, fits the available space, and allows proper service access to all equipment. Carry on the Work in such a manner that the Work of the other trades will not be hand icapped, hindered, or delayed at any time.

F. Work of this Division shall progress according to the "Construction Schedule" as described in Division 01 and as approved by the Contract Administrator . Cooperate in establishing these schedules and perform the Work under this Division, in a timely manner in conformance with the construction schedule so as to ensure successful achievement of all schedule dates.

1.6 MEASUREMENTS AND LAYOUTS
A. The Drawings are schematic in nature, but show the various compone nts of the systems approximately to scale and attempt to indicate how they are to be integrated with other parts of the Work. Figured dimensions take precedence to scaled dimensions. Determine exact locations by job measurements, by checking the requirements of other trades, and by reviewing all Contract Documents. Correct, at no additional costs to the Owner, errors that could have been avoided by proper checking and inspection.

1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for submittal req uirements, in addition to requirements specified herein.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-5
B. Submittals and shop drawings shall not contain Henderson Engineer’s firm name or logo, nor shall they contain the Henderson E ngineer’s seal and signature. They shall not be copies of Henderson Engineer’s work product. If the Contractor desires to use elements of such product, the license agreement for transfer of information at the end of this section must be used.

C. Assemble and submit for review manufacturer product literature for material and equipment to be furnished and/or installed under this Division . Literature shall include shop drawings, manufacturer product data, performance sheets, samples, and other submittals required by this Division. Provide the number of submittals required by Division 1; if hard-copy sets are provided, submit a minimum of seven (7) sets. General product catalog data not specifically noted to be part of the specified product will be rejected and returned without review.

D. Separate submittals according to individual speci fication sections. Only resubmit those sections requested for resubmittal.

E. Provide submittals in sufficient detail so as to demonstrate compliance with these Contract Documents and the design concept. Highlight, mark, list or indicate the materials, perfo rmance criteria and accessories that are being proposed. Illegible submittals will be rejected and returned without review.

F. Refer to individual sections for additional submittal requirements.

G. Transmit submittals as early as required to support the project schedule. Allow two weeks for Engineer review time, plus to/from mailing time via the Contract Administrator, plus a duplication of this time for resubmittals, if required. Transmit submittals as soon as possible after Notice to Proceed and before electrical construction starts.

H. Before transmitting submittals and material lists, verify that the equipment submitted is mutually compatible with and suitable for the intended use. Verify that the equipment will fit the available space and maintain manufacturer recommended service clea rances. If the size of equipment furnished makes necessary any change in location, or configuration, submit a shop drawing showing the proposed layout.

I. Submittals shall contain the following information:

1. The project name.

2. The applicable specification section and paragraph.

3. Equipment identification acronym as used on the drawings.

4. The submittal date.

6. Submittals not so identified will be returned to the Contractor without action.

J. Refer to Division 1 for acceptance of electronic submittals for this project. For electronic submittals, Contractor shall submit the doc uments in accordance with this Section and the procedures specified in Division 1. Contractor shall notify the Contract Administrator and Engineer that the submittals have been posted. If electronic submittal procedures are not defined in Division 1, Contractor shall include the website, user name and password information needed to access the submittals. For submittals sent by e -mail, Contractor shall copy the Contractor Administrator’s and Engineer’s designated representatives. Contractor shall allow for the Engineer review time as specified above in the construction schedule. Contractor shall submit only the documents required to purchase the materials and/or equipment in the submittal .

K. The checking and subsequent acceptance by the Engineer and/or Contract Administrator of submittals shall not relieve responsibility from the Contractor for (1) deviations from the Drawings and Specifications; ( 2) errors in dimensions, details, sizes of equipment, or quantities; (3) omissions of components or fittings; and (4) not coordinating items with actual building conditions and adjacent work. Contractor shall request and secure written acceptance from the Engineer and Contract Administrator prior to implementing any deviation.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-6

1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for substitutions in addition to requirements specified herein.

B. Materials, products , equipment, and systems described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by the proposed substitution.

C. The base bid shall include only the products from manufacturers specifically named in the drawings and specifications.

D. Request for Substitution:

1. Complete and send the Substitution Request Form attached at the end of this section for each material, product, equipment, or system that is proposed to be substituted.

2. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer.

3. Unless stated otherwise in writing to the Engineer by the Contractor, Contractor warran ts to the Engineer, Architect, and Owner the following:
a. Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to meet or exceed the specified Work in all respects.
b. Proposed substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results, including functional clearances, maintenance service, and sourcing of replacement parts.
c. Proposed substitution has received necessary approvals of the Authorities H aving Jurisdiction.
d. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified Work. e. If accepted substitution fails to perform as required, Contractor shall replace substitute material or system with that originally specified and bear costs incurred thereby.
f. Coordination, installation and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects.

E. Substitution Consideration:

1. No substitutions will be considered unless the Substitution Request Form is completed and attached with the appropriate substitution documentation.

2. No substitutions will be considered prior to receipt of bids unless written request for approval to bid has been received by the Engineer at least ten (10) calendar days prior to the date for receipt of bids.

3. If the proposed substitution is approved prior to receipt of bids, such approval will be stated in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. Verbal approval will not be given.

4. No substitutions will be considered after the Contract is awarded unless specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

1.9 ELECTRONIC DRAWING FILES
A. In preparation of shop drawings or record drawings, Contractor may, at their option, obtain electronic drawing files in AutoCAD or DXF format from the Engineer for a shipping and handling fee of $200 for a drawing set up to 12 sheets and $15 per sheet for each additional sheet.

B. Contractor shall request and complete the Electronic File Release Agreement form from the Engineer. Send the form along with a check made payable to Henderson Engineers, Inc.

Contractor shall indicate the desired shipping method and drawing format on the attached form.

C. Contact the Architect for Architect’s written authorization.

D. The following must be received before electronic drawing files will be sent:

1. Architect’s written authorization

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-7

2. Engineer’s release agreement form

3. Payment

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Execute all work under this Division in a thorough and professional manner by competent and experienced workmen duly trained to perform the work specified.

B. Install all work in strict conformance with all manufacturers' requirements and recommendations, unless these Documents exceed those requirements. Install all equipment and materials in a neat and professional manner, aligned, leveled, and adjusted for satisfactory operation, in accordance with NECA guidelines.

C. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide all material and equipment new, of the best quality and design, free from defects and imperfections and with markings or a nameplate identifying the manufacturer and providing sufficient reference to establish quality, si ze and capacity. Provide all material and equipment of the same type from the same manufacturer whenever practicable.

D. Unless specified otherwise, manufactured items of the same types specified within this Division shall have been installed and used, witho ut modification, renovation, or repair for not less than one year prior to date of bidding for this Project.

1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Operation and Maintenance Manuals in addition to requirements specified herein.

B. Submit manuals prior to requesting the final punch list and before all requests for Substantial Completion.

C. Instruct the Owner's permanent personnel in the proper operation of, startup and shutdown procedures and maintenance of the equipment and components of the systems installed under this Division.

D. Prior to Substantial Completion of the project, furnish to the Contract Administrator, for Engineer’s review, and for the Owner’s use, four (4) copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals in labeled, hard-back three-ring binders, with cover, binding label, tabbed dividers and plastic insert folders for Record Drawings. Include local contacts , complete with address and telephone number, for equipment, apparatus, an d system components furnished and installed under this Division of the specifications.

E. Each manual shall contain equipment data, approved submittals, shop drawings, diagrams, capacities, spare part numbers, manufacturer service and mainte nance data, warran ties and guarantees.

F. Refer to Division 1 for acceptance of electronic manuals for this project. For electronic manuals, Contractor shall submit the doc uments in accordance with this S ection and the procedures specified in Division 1. Contractor shall notif y the Contract Administrator and Engineer that the manuals have been posted. If electronic manual procedures are not defined in Division 1, Contractor shall include the website, user name and password information needed to access the manuals. For manuals s ent by e -mail, Contractor sha ll copy the Contract Administrator’s and Engineer’s designated representatives.

1.12 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide to the Owner the spare parts specified in the individual sections of this Division

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-8

1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Division 01 and Ge neral Conditions for Record Drawings in addition to requirements specified herein.

B. A set of work prints of the Contract Documents shall be kept on the jobsite during construction for the purpose of noting changes. During the course of construction, the Contractor shall indicate on these Documents changes made from the original Contract Documents. Particular attention shall be paid to those items which need to be located for servicing. Underground utilities shall be located by dimension from column lines.

1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for Delivery, Storage and Handling in addition to requirements specified herein.

B. Deliver equipment and material to the job site in their original containers with labels in tact, fully identified with manufacturer's name, make, model, model number, type, size, capacity and Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. labels and other pertinent information necessary to identify the item.

C. Deliver, receive, handle and store equipment and materials at the job site in the designated area and in such a manner as to prevent equipment and materials from damage and loss. Store equipment and materials delivered to the site on pallets and cover with waterproof, tear resistant tarp or plastic or as required to keep equipment and materials dry. Follow manufacturer's recommendations, and at all times, take every precaution to properly protect equipment and material from damage, including the erection of temporary shelters to adequately protect equipment and material stored at the Site. Equipment and/or material which becomes rusted or damaged shall be replaced or restored by the Contractor to a condition acceptable to the Contract Administrator.

D. Be responsible for the safe storage of tools, material and equipment.

1.15 WARRANTIES
A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for Warranties in addition to requirements specified herein.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

C. Warrant each sy stem and each element thereof against all defects due to faulty workmanship, design or material for a period of 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, unless specific items are noted to carry a longer warranty in these Construction Documents or man ufacturer’s standard warranty exceeds 12 months. Remedy all defects, occurring within the warranty period(s), as stated in the General Conditions and Division 01.

D. Also warrant the following additional items:

1. All raceways are free from obstructions, holes, crushing, or breaks of any nature.

2. All raceway seals are effective.

3. The entire electrical system is free from all short circuits and unwanted open circuits and grounds.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-9
E. The above warranties shall include labor and material. Make repairs or replacements without any additional costs to the Owner.

F. Perform the remedial work promptly, upon written notice from the Contract Administrator or Owner.

G. At the time of Substantial Completion, deliver to the Owner all warranties, in writing and properly executed, including term limits for warranties extending beyond the one year period, each warranty instrument being addressed to the Owner and stating the commencement date and term.

1.16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for Temporary Facilities requirements in addition to requirements specified herein.

B. Temporary Utilities: The types of services required include, but are not limited to, electricity, telephone, and internet. When connecting to existing franchised utilities for r equired services, comply with service companies’ recommendations on materials and methods, or engage service companies to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize interference with construction operations.

C. Construction Facilities: Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations properly and adequately.

1. Enclosures: When temporary enclosures are required to ensure adequate workmanship, weather protection and ambient conditions required for the work, provide fire -retardant treated lumber and plywood; provide tarpaulins with UL label and flame spread of 15 or less; provide translucent type (nylon reinforced polyethylene) where daylighting of enclosed space would be beneficial for workmanship, and reduce use of temporary lighting.

2. Heating: Provide heat, as necessary, to protect work, materials and equipment from damage due to dampness and cold. In areas where building is occupied, maintain a temperature not less than 65 degrees F. Use steam, hot water, or gas from piped distribution system where available. Where steam, hot water or piped gas are not available, heat with self-contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters, bearing UL, FM or other approval labels appropriate for application. Vent fuel-burning heaters, and equip units with individual-space thermostatic controls. Use electric -resistance space heaters only where no other, more energy-efficient, type of heater is available and allowable.

1.17 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Conditions Affecting Work In Existing Buildings: The following project conditions apply:

1. The Drawings describe the general nature of remodeling to the existing building; however, visit the site prior to submitting bid to determine the nature and extent of work involved.

2. Schedule work in the existing building with the Owner.

3. Perform certain demolition work prior to the remodeling. Perform the demolition that involves electrical systems, Light fixtures, equipment, raceways, equipment supports or foundations and materials.

4. Remove articles that ar e not required for the new work. Unless otherwise indicated, remove each item removed during this demolition from the premises and dispose in accordance with applicable federal, state and local regulations.

5. Relocate and reconnect electrical facilities tha t must be relocated in order to accomplish the remodeling shown in the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications. Where electrical equipment or materials are removed, cap unused raceways below the floor line or behind the wall line to facilitate restoration of finish.

6. Finish material will be installed under other divisions.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-10

7. Obtain permission from the Contract Administrator for channeling of floors or walls not specifically noted on the Drawings.

8. Protect adjacent materials indicated to remain. For work specific to this Division, install and maintain dust and noise barriers to keep dirt, dust, and noise from being transmitted to adjacent areas. Remove protection and barriers after demolition operations are complete.

9. Locate, identify, and protect electrica l services passing through demolition area and serving other areas outside the demolition limits. Maintain services to areas outside demolition limits. When services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for affected areas.

B. Conditions Affecting Excavations: The following project conditions apply:

1. Maintain and protect existing building services that transit the area affected by selective demolition.

2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by s ettlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by excavation operations.

C. Site Information: Subsurface conditions were investigated during the design of the Project.

Reports of these investigations are available for informa tion only; data in the reports are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information.

D. Use of explosives is not permitted.

E. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within the limits specified by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers to wet substrates.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2.2 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Existing conditions indicated on the Drawings are taken from the best information available from the Owner, existing record drawings, and from limited, in -situ, visual site observations; and, they are not to be construed as "AS BUILT" conditions. The information is shown to help establish the extent of the new work.

B. Verify all actual existing conditions at the project site and perform the Work as required to meet the existing conditions and the intent of the Work indicated.

2.3 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Prepare and submit a schedule of anticipated utility outages indicating dates and duration.

Schedule
B. Schedule and coordinate with the utility companies, Owner and with the Contract Administrator all connections to, relocation of, or discontinuation of normal utility services from any existing utility line. Include all premium time required for all such work in the bid.

C. Repair all existing utilities damaged due to construction operations to the satisfaction of the Owner or utility companies without additional cost.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-11
D. Do not leave utilities disconnected at the end of a workday or over a weekend unless authorized by representatives of the Owner or Contract Administrator.

E. Make repairs and restoration of utilities before workers leave the project at the end of the workday in which the interruption takes place.

F. Include in bid the cost of furnishing temporary facilities to provide all services during interruption of normal utility service.

2.4 WORK IN EXISTING FACILITIES
A. The Drawings describe the general nature of remodeling to the existing facilities; however, visit the site prior to submitting a bid, to determine the nature and extent of work involved.

B. Schedule work in the existing facility with the Owner.

C. Certain demolition work shall be performed prior to the remodeling. Perform the demolition that involves electrical systems, fixtures, conduit, wiring, equipment, equipment supports or foundations and materials.

D. Remove all of these articles that are not required for the new work. Unless otherwise indicated, each item removed during this demolition shall be removed from the premises and disposed of in accordance with all state and local regulations.

E. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Contract Administrator and the Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Contract Administrator and the Owner’s written permission.

3. Owner reserves the right to require Contractor to cease work in any area Owner requires access to on an emergency basis.

F. Relocate and reconnect all electrical facilities that must be relocated in order to accomplish the remodeling shown in the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications. Where electrical fixtures or equipment are removed, cap all unused raceways behind the floor line or wall line to facilitate restoration of finish, and, remove all existing wiring from abandoned raceways.

G. Finish materials are specified in other divisions.

H. Where removal of existing wiring interrupts electrical continuity of circuits that are to remain in use, provide necessary wiring, raceways, junction boxes, etc., to ensure continued electrical continuity.

I. Channel walls and floors as required to produce the desired result; however, obtain permission from the Contract Administrator for all channeling not specifically noted on the Drawings.

J. Provide new, typewritten card directory for distribution equipment (including but not limited to load centers, panelboards, switchboards and switchgear) where changes occur under this scope of work. Indicate exact loads served by each existing circuit breaker or switch.

2.5 PERMITS
A. Secure and pay for all permits required in connection with the installation of the Electrical Work.

Arrange with the various utility companies for the installation and connection of all required utilities for this facility and pay all charges associated therewi th including connection charges and inspection fees, except where these services or fees are designated to be provided by others.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-12

2.6 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND WIRING
A. Provide 208Y/120 volt, three-phase, four-wire, temporary electrical service and temporary lighting system to facilitate construction.

B. In existing facilities, with Owner’s approval, Contractor may utilize the existing electrical system as the source of temporary power. Coordinate the point of connection and method of connection to the existing system with the Owner’s Representative.

C. Pay all charges made by the Electric Utility, with respect to installation and energy charges for temporary services.

D. Work for the temporary power shall consist of all labor and materials, including, but not limited to conduit, wiring, panelboards, fuse blocks, fused disconnecting switches, fuses, pigtails, receptacles, wood panel switch supports, and other miscellaneous materials required to complete the power system.

E. Install all temporary wiring in accordance with applicable codes, and maintain in an OSHA - approved manner.

F. Provide an adequate number of GFCI type power distribution centers, rated 208Y/120V, four - wire, and not less than 60A, with sufficient fuse blocks or breakers for lighting and hand tool circuits, 60A four -wire feeders, all mounted within pre -fabricated enclosures UL listed for this application or on suitable wood panels bolted to columns or upright wood supports as required.

G. Install circuits to points on each level of each building so that service outlets can be reached by a 50-foot extension cord for 120V power and a 100 -foot extension cord for 208V power (or as required by OSHA or local authorities).

H. Provide one lighting outlet per 30 linear feet of corridor and at least one light in each room and for every 800 square feet of floor area. Temporary lighting shall comply with OSHA requirements.

I. If additional service is required for cranes, electrical welders or for electric motors over 1/2 HP per unit, such additional service shall become the responsibility of the trade involved.

J. When the permanent wiring for lighting and power is installed, with approval of the Contract Administrator and Owner, the permanent system may be used, provided the Contractor assumes full responsibility for all electrical material, equipment, and devices contained in the systems and provided that roof drainage system and roofing are complete.

K. When directed by the Contract Administrator, remove all temporary services, lighting, wiring and devices from the property.

2.7 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 01, Division 02, and General Conditions for Selective Demolition requirements in addition to the requirements specified herein.

B. General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned electrical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or saved.

C. Materials and Equip ment To Be Salvaged: remove, demount, disconnect existing electrical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and salvaged, and deliver materials and equipment to the location designated for storage.

D. Disposal and Cleanup: Remove from the site and le gally dispose of demolished materials and equipment not indicated to be salvaged.

E. Electrical Materials and Equipment: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the following items:

1. Inactive and obsolete raceways, fittings, supports and specialties, equipme nt, wiring, controls, fixtures, and insulation:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-13
a. Raceways and outlets embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such materials do not interfere with new installations. Cut embedded raceways to below finished surfaces, seal, and refinish surface s as specified or as indicated on the Architectural Finish Drawings. Remove materials above accessible ceilings. Cap raceways allowed to remain.
b. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 01, General Conditions and "Cutting and Patching" portion of this Section in Division 26.

2.8 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT
A. Locate all pull boxes, junction boxes and controls so as to provide easy access for operation, service inspection and maintenance. Provide an access door where equipment or devices are located above inaccessible ceilings. Refer to Division 26 Section “ Common Work Results for Electrical”.

B. Maintain all code required clearances and clearances required by manufacturers.

2.9 PENETRATIONS
A. Unless otherwise noted as being provided under other divisions, provide sleeves, box frames, or both, for openings in floors, walls, partitions and ceilings for all electrical work that passes through construction. Refer to Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical”.

B. Provide sleeves, box frames, or both, for all conduit, cable, and busways that pass through masonry, concrete or block walls.

C. The cutting of new and/or existing construction will not be permitted except by written approval of the Contract Administrator.

2.10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A. Refer to Division 01, Division 02 and General Conditions for Excavation and Backfilling in addition to the requirements specified herein.

B. Perform excavation of every description, of whatever substance encountered and to the depth required in connection with the installation of the work under this division. Excavation shall be in conformance with applicable Divisions and sections of the Specifications.

C. Restore roads, alleys, streets and sidewalks damaged during this work to the satisfaction of Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

D. Do not excavate trenches close to walks or columns without prior consultation with the Contract Administrator.

E. Erect barricades around excavations, for safety, and place an adequate number of amber lights on or near the work and keep those burning from dusk to dawn. Be responsible for all damage that any parties may sustain in consequence of neglecting the necessary preca utions in prosecuting the work.

F. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local, state and federal codes and ordinances. Shore and brace as required for stability of excavation.

G. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local, state and federal codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open.

1. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed to remain, cut top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below finished grade elevation.

H. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and ordinances.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-14
I. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or run -off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. In no case shall sewers be used as drains for such water.

J. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavati ons. Do not store within drip - line of trees indicated to remain.

2. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill.

K. Excavation for Underground Tanks and Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection.

1. Excavate, by hand, areas within drip -line of la rge trees. Protect the root system from damage and dry-out. Maintain moist conditions for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of one inch in diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint.

2. Take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed.

L. Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installations as follows:

1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of six to nine inches clearance on both sides of raceway and cables.

2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required for raceway and cables to establish slope, away from buildings and indicated elevations. Beyond building perimeter, excava te trenches to an elevation below frost line.

3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which raceway and cables can be installed, tested, and the trench backfilled within the same day.

4. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of raceway and cables. Provide a minimum of six inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and raceway and cables.

5. Excavate trenches for raceway, cables, and equipment with bottoms of trench to accurate elevations for support of raceway and cables on undisturbed soil.

M. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F.

N. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section.

1. Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and excavated or borrowed materials.

2. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials.

3. Under raceway and cables, use subbase materials where required over rock bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation.

4. For raceway and cables less than 30 inches below surf ace of roadways, provide 4 -inch- thick concrete base slab support. After installation and testing of raceway and cables, provide a 4 -inch thick concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of roadway subbase.

5. Other areas use excavated or borrowed materials.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-15
O. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:

1. Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been recorded.

2. Removal of concrete formwork.

3. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids.

4. Removal of trash and debris.

P. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

1. For vertical and diagonal raceway installations, thoroughly support raceways from permanent structures or undisturbed earth at no less that 10 -foot intervals, while placing backfill materials, so that raceways are not deflected, crushed, broken, or otherwise damaged by the backfill placement.

Q. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry d ensity or relative dry density for each area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

R. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and e quipment to required elevations. Prevent displacement of raceways and equipment by carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift.

S. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below:

1. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well -defined moisture -density relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well -defined moisture -density relationship (cohesionless soils).
a. Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material.
b. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material.
c. Other Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subg rade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90 percent relative density for cohesionless soils.

2. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction operations.

T. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at mechanical install ation excavations during the period 12 months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment.

Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas.

2.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Provide all necessary cutting of walls, floors, ceilings and roofs for work under this Division.

B. Cut no structural member without permission from Contract Administrator.

C. Patch around all openings to match adjacent construction.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-16
D. After the final waterproofing membrane has been installed, roofs may be cut only with written permission by the Contract Administrator.

2.12 PAINTING
A. Refer to Division 09 Section “Painting” for painting requirements.

B. Paint exposed ferrous surfaces, including, but not limited to, hangers, equipment stands and supports using materials and methods as specified under individual sections and Division 09 of the Specifications; colors shall be as selected by the Contract Administrator.

C. Re-finish all field-threaded ends of galvanized conduits and field-cut ends of galvanized supports with a cold -galvanizing compound approved for use on co nductive surfaces. Follow closely manufacturer’s instructions for pre-cleaning surfaces and application.

D. Factory finishes and shop priming and special finishes are specified in the individual equipment Specification sections.

E. Where factory finishes are p rovided and no additional field painting is specified, touch up or refinish, as required by, and to the acceptance of, the Contract Administrator, marred or damaged surfaces so as to leave a smooth, uniform finish. If, in the opinion of the Contract Administrator, the finish is too badly damaged to be properly re -finished, replace the damaged equipment or materials at no additional costs to the Owner.

2.13 CLEANING
A. Remove dirt and refuse, resulting from the performance of the Work, from the premises as required to prevent accumulation. Cooperate in maintaining reasonably clean premises at all times.

B. Immediately prior to final inspection, make a final cleanup of dirt and refuse resulting from the Work and assist in making the premises broom clean. Clean all material and equipment installed under this Division.

C. Remove dirt, dust, plaster, stains, and foreign matter from all surfaces.

D. Touch up and restore damaged finishes to their original condition.

2.14 ACCEPTANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform acceptance test procedures in accordance with the specifications listed in the Reference Joint Appendices for the Building Energy Efficiency Standards of California. Reference the Non - Residential Certificate of Compliance (NRCC) forms on the drawings for the systems that shall be tested.

B. Submit Non-Residential Certificate of Acceptance (NRCA) forms for each system for which the CLCATT is responsible.

2.15 ADJUSTING, ALIGNING AND TESTING
A. Adjust, align and test all electrical equipment furnished and/or installed under this D ivision.

B. Check motors for alignment with drive and proper rotation, and adjust as required.

C. Check and test protective devices for specified and required application, and adjust as required.

D. Check, test and adjust adjustable parts of all light fixtures and electrical equipment as required to produce the intended performance.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-17
E. Verify that completed wiring system is free from short circuits, unintentional grounds, low insulation impedances, and unintentional open circuits.

F. After completion, perform tests for continuity, unwanted grounds, and insulation resistance in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and NETA.

G. Be responsible for the operation, service and maintenance of all new electrical equipment during construction and prior to acceptance by th e Owner of the complete project under this Contract.

Maintain all electrical equipment in the best operating condition including proper lubrication.

H. Notify the Contract Administrator immediately of all operational failures caused by defective material, labor or both.

I. Maintain service and equipment for all testing of electrical equipment and systems until all work is approved and accepted by the Owner.

J. Keep a calibrated voltmeter and ammeter (true RMS type) available at all times. Provide service for test readings when and as required.

K. Refer to individual sections for additional and specific requirements.

2.16 START-UP OF SYSTEMS
A. Prior to start -up of electrical systems, check all components and devices, lubricate items appropriately, and tighten all screwed an d bolted connections to manufacturers’ recommended torque values using appropriate torque tools.

B. Each power, lighting and control circuit shall be energized, tested and proved free of breaks, short-circuits and unwanted grounds.

C. Adjust taps on each transformer for rated secondary voltages.

D. Balance all single phase loads at each panelboard, redistributing branch circuit connections until balance is achieved to plus or minus 10 percent.

E. Replace all burned -out lamps. Replace the lamps of all light fixtures that use incandescent, halogen or quartz lamp sources that are installed as part of the finished building, but are used by the Contractor during construction, with new lamps of appropriate type and wattage prior to turning the facility over to the Owner.

F. After all systems have been inspected and adjusted, confirm all operating features required by the Drawings and Specifications and make final adjustments as necessary.

G. Demonstrate that all equipment and systems perform properly as designed per Drawings and Specifications.

H. At the time of final review and tests of the power and lighting systems, all equipment and system components shall be in place and all connections at panelboards, switches, circuit breakers, and the like, shall be complete. All fuses shal l be in place, and all circuits shall be continuous from point of service connections to all switches, receptacles, outlets, and the like.

2.17 TEST REPORTS
A. Perform tests as required by these Specifications and submit the results in the operations and maintenance manuals. The tests shall establish the adequacy, quality, safety, and reliability for each electrical system installed. Notify the Contract Administrator and Engineer two working days prior to each test.

B. For specific testing requirements of special systems, refer to the Specification section that describes that system.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-18
C. Upon completing each test, record the results, date and time of each test and the conditions under which the test was conducted. Submit to the Contract Administrator, for Engineer’s review, in duplicate, the test results for the following electrical items:

1. Building service entrance voltage and amperes at each phase.

2. Electrical service grounding conditions and grounding resistance.

3. Proper phasing throughout the entire system.

4. Voltages (phase -to-phase and phase -to-neutral) and amperes at each phase for each panelboard, switchboard, and the like.

5. Phase voltages and amperes at each three-phase motor.

6. Test all wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity of connections.

D. Promptly correct all failures or deficiencies revealed by these tests as determined by the Engineer.

2.18 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION REVIEW
A. Prior to requesting a site observation for "CERTIFICATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION", complete the following items:

1. Submit complete Operation and Maintenance Data.

2. Submit complete Record Drawings.

3. Perform all required training of Owner’s personnel.

4. Turn over all spares and extra materials to the Owner, along with a complete inventory of spares and extra materials being turned over.

5. Perform start-up tests of all systems.

6. Remove all temporary facilities from the site.

7. Comply with all requirements for Substantial Completion in the Division 01 and General Conditions.

B. Request in writing a review for Substantial Completion. Give the Contract Administrator at least seven (7) days notice prior to the review.

C. State in the written request that the Contractor has complied with the requirements for Substantial Completion.

D. Upon receipt of a request for review, the Contract Administrator will either proceed with the review or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements.

E. If the Contractor requests a site visit for Substantial Completion review prior to completing the above-mentioned items, he shall reimburse the Contract Administrator and Engineer for time and expenses incurred for the visit.

F. Upon completion of the review, the Contract Administrator will prepare a “final list” of outstanding items to be completed or corrected for final acceptance.

G. Omissions on the “final list” shall not relieve the Contractor from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

H. Prior to requesting a final review, submit a copy of the final list of items to be completed or corrected. State in writin g that each item has been completed, resolved for acceptance or the reason it has not been completed.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-19

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 10-20

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00-1
SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods, electrical equipment coordination, and common electrical installation requirements as follows:

1. Access doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to electrical materials and equipment.

2. Sleeves and seals for electrical penetrations.

3. Joint sealers for sealing around electric al materials and equipment, and for sealing penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors, and foundation walls.

4. Sealing penetrations through noise critical spaces.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. The following abbreviations apply to this and other Sections of these Specifications:

1. AHJ: Authority(ies) having Jurisdiction

2. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications

3. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene monomer rubber

4. MC: Metal Clad

5. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber

6. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory

7. PCF: Pounds per Cubic Foot
B. The following definitions apply to this and other Sections of these Specifications:

1. Homerun: That portion of an electrical circuit originating at a junction box, termination box, receptacle or switch with termination at an electrical panelbo ard. Note: Where MC Cable is utilized for receptacle and/or lighting branch circuiting loads, the originating point of the homerun shall be at the first load in the circuit or at a junction box in an accessible ceiling space immediately above the first load.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipmen t with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping, ducts, and other systems installed at required slopes and/or elevations.

4. So connecting raceways, cables, and wireways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast -in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for e lectrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed.

D. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00-2

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 01 and Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements”:

1. Product data for the following products:
a. Sleeve seals.
b. Through and membrane penetration firestopping systems. c. Joint sealers
d. Acoustical sealers

2. Shop drawings for:
a. Detailed fabrication drawings of access panels and doors.

3. Through and Membrane Penetration Firestopping Systems Product Schedule: Provide UL listing, location, wall or floor rating and installation drawing for each penetration fire stop system.
a. Where Project conditions require modification to qualified testing and inspecting agency’s illustrations for a particular firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, ap proved by penetration firestopping manufacturer’s fire - protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire -resistance-rated assembly.
b. Qualifications data for testing agency.

4. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings as required by Division 1 an d Division 26 a. Accurately record actual locations of firestopped penetrations and access panel/door locations. Indicate dimensions from fixed structural elements.

1.5 NOISE CRITICAL SPACES
A. Many areas of the building, referred to as "noise-critical spaces", require special attention (special acoustical provisions and restrictions). The table below designates the noise-critical spaces that will require application of sound attenuating measures and acoustical sealants.

1. Ballrooms
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

B. Where a list is provided, manufacturers are listed alphabetically and not in accordance with any ranking or preference.

2.2 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturers:

1. Bar-Co., Inc.

2. Elmdor Stoneman.

3. JL Industries

4. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.

5. Karp Associates, Inc.

6. Milcor

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00-3

7. Nystrom Building Products

8. Wade

9. Zurn
B. Access Doors:

1. Provide access doors for all concealed equipment, except where above lay -in ceilings.

Refer to Section “Identification for Electrical Systems” for labeling of access doors .

2. Access doors shall be adequately sized for the devices served with a minimum size of 18 inches x 18 inches, furnished by the respective Contractor or Subcontractor and installed by the General Contractor.

3. Access doors must be of the proper construction for type of construction where installed.

4. The exact location of all access doors shall be verified with the Contract Administrator prior to installation.

5. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory -fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

6. Frames: 16-gauge steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling. a. For installation in masonry, concrete, ce ramic tile, or wood paneling: 1 -inch-wide exposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors. b. For installation in gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead.
c. For installation in full-bed plaster applications: galvanized, expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame.

7. Flush Panel Doors: 14 -gauge sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint. a. Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self- closing mechanism.

8. Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks.

9. Locking Devices: Where indicated on the drawings or where access panels are installed in locations accessible to the public , provide 5 -pin or 5-disc type cylinder locks, individually keyed; provide 2 keys.

2.3 SLEEVES
A. Steel sleeves for raceways and cables

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends and drip rings.

B. Cast iron wall pipe sleeves for raceways and cables

1. Manufacturers
a. Josam Mfg. Co.
b. Smith (Jay R) Mfg. Co.
c. Tyler Pipe/Wade Div.; Subs of Tyler Corp.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.
e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.

2. Cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange with clamping ring, and nuts for membrane flashing.
a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

3. Sleeves for rectangular openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minim um 0.052- or 0.138- inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

4. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping to be used.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00-4

2.4 SEALANTS
A. SLEEVE SEALS

1. Description: Modular sealing device, design ed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. O-Z/Gedney
e. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

3. Sealing Elements: Interlocking or solid sealing links shaped or pre-drilled to fit surface of cable or raceway. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
a. EPDM

4. Pressure Plates: Include two for each sealing element. For multi-phase circuits, use slotted pressure plates if metal.
a. PVC-coated steel

5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
a. Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating
B. JOINT SEALERS

1. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application.

2. Colors: As selected by the Contract Administrator from manufacturer's standard colors.

3. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types:
a. One-part, nonacid -curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer. b. One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non -traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.
c. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) One-Part, Nonacid-Curing, Silicone Sealant:
a) "Dow Corning 790," Dow Corning Corp.
b) "Dow Corning 795," Dow Corning Corp.
c) "Silglaze N SCS 2801," General Electric Co.
d) "Silpruf SCS 2000," General Electric Co.
e) "864," Pecora Corp.
f) ."Omniseal," Sonneborn Building Products Div
g) "Spectrem 1," Tremco, Inc.
h) "Spectrem 2," Tremco, Inc.
2) One-Part, Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Sealant:
a) "Dow Corning 786," Dow Corning Corp.
b) "Sanitary 1700," General Electric Co.
c) "898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant," Pecora Corp.
d) "OmniPlus," Sonneborn Building Products Div.
e) "Tremsil 600 White," Tremco Corp.

4. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One -part, non-sagging, mildew-resistant, paintable complying with ASTM C 834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) "Chem-Calk 600," Bostik

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00-5
2) "AC-20," Pecora Corp.
3) "Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div.
4) "Tremflex 834," Tremco, Inc.

C. FIRESTOPPING

1. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings indicated, as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with UL 2079 or ASTM E 814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other NRTL acceptable to AHJ.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Hilti, Inc.
2) RectorSeal.
3) Specified Technologies Inc.
4) 3M Corp.
5) United States Gypsum Company.

D. ACOUSTICAL SEALANTS sealants

1. Foam Backer Rod: Closed cell polyethylene suitable for use as a backing for non-hardening sealant.

2. Non-Hardening Penetration Sealant: Non -hardening polysulphide t ype, P ermanently flexible, approved firestop putty may be used in lieu of the sealant on foam rod in noise critical walls that are also fire rated.

3. Packing Material: Mineral fiber; non -combustible; resistant to water, mildew and vermin.

Expanding resilient foams manufactured for this purpose are an acceptable alternative only if the material density is at least 15 PCF (40 kg/m3).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Coordinate sl eeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping”.

C. Coordinate seals with wall, ceiling, roof or floor materials and rating of the surface (sound, fire, waterproofing, etc.)
D. Comply with NECA 1.

E. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items, unless indicated otherwise.

F. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indic ated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

G. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

H. Right of Way: Yield to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 ACCESS DOORS
A. Coordinate with architectural finishes to set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

B. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00-6
C. Label all access doors with a nameplate as described in Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Systems”.

3.3 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Provide sleeves for required openings in all concrete and masonry construction and fire, smoke, or both, partitions, for all electrical work that passes through such construction. Coordinate with all other trades and divisions to dimension and lay out all such openings.

C. Only those openings specifically indicated on the Architectural or Structural Drawings will be provided under other divisions.

D. New Construction:

1. Coordinate with Divisions 03 and 04 for installation of sleeves and sleeve seals integrally in cast-in-place, precast, and masonry walls and horizontal slabs where indicated on the Drawings or as required to support raceway penetrations.

E. Construction in Existing Facilities:

1. Saw cut or core drill existing walls and slabs to install sleeves and sleeve seals in existing facilities. Do not cut or drill any walls or slabs without first coordinating with, and receiving approval from, the Contract Administrator, Owner, or both. Seal sleeves into concrete walls or slabs with a waterproof non-shrink grout acceptable to the Contract Administrator.

F. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. Do not cut or core drill new construction without written approval from the Contract Administrator and Structural Engineer.

G. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

H. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

I. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

J. Install pipe and rectangular sleeves in above -grade walls and slabs, where penetrations are not subject to hydrostatic water pressures. Ensure that drip ring is fully encased and sealed wi thin the wall or slab.

K. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

L. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

M. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed; in which case, size sleeves as recommended by the seal manufacturer.

N. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

O. Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00-7
P. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials.

Q. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot- type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

R. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (or larger, if required by the seal manufacturer) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

S. Above Grade Concrete or Masonry Penetrations

1. Provide sleeves for cables or raceways passing through above grade concrete or masonry walls, concrete floor or roof slabs. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes in existing masonry walls, concrete floors or roofs. Provide sleeves as follows:
a. Install schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
b. Install galvanized sheet metal for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger, thickness shall be 0.138 inches.
c. Install galvanized sheet metal for rectangular sleeves d. Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves are acceptable for use in areas without return air plenums.

2. Seal elevated floor, exterior wall and roof penetrations watertight and weather tight with non-shrink, non-hardening commercial sealant. Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends with minimum of ½” of sealant.

T. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast -iron wall pipes for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1 -inch (or larger, if required by the mechanical sleeve manufacturer) annular clear space between sleeve and cable or raceway. Provide mechanical sleeve seal.

1. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

2. Inspect installed sleeve and s leeve-seal installation for damage and faulty work. Verify watertight integrity of sleeves and seals installed below grade to seal against hydrostatic pressure.

U. Elevated Floor Penetrations of waterproof membrane:

1. Provide cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves. Size wall pipe for minimum ½” annular space between wall pipe and cable or raceway.

2. Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends with minimum of ½” of waterproof sealant.

3. Secure waterproof membrane flashing between clamping flange and clamping ring.

4. Extend bottom of wall pipe below floor slab as required and secure underdeck clamp to hold wall pipe rigidly in place.

V. Interior Foundation Penetration: Provide sleeves for horizontal raceway passing through or under foundation. Sleeves shall be cast iron soil pipe two normal pipe sizes larger than the pipe served.

W. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable or raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends with minimum of ½” of sealant.

X. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or duct, using joint sealant for size, depth, and location of joint. Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends with minimum of ½” of waterproof sealant.

Y. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables wi th flexible boot- type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

Z. Sleeve-Seal Installation

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00-8

1. Install sleeve seals for all underground racewa y penetrations through walls at elevations below finished grade. Additionally, install seals inside raceways, after conductors or cables have been installed, in all raceway penetrations through walls at elevations below finished grade.

2. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

AA. Inspect installed sleeve and sleeve -seal installations for damage and faulty work. Verify watertight integrity of sleeves and seals installed below grade and above grade w here installed to seal against hydrostatic pressure.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire /smoke-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

3.5 JOINT SEALERS
A. Preparation for Joint Sealers

1. Clean surfaces of penetrations, sleeves, or both, immediately before applying joint sealers, to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer.

2. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer.

Protect adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape.

Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

B. Application of Joint Sealers

1. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. a. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants. b. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic -emulsion joint sealants.

2. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shining or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess se alants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

C. Installation of Fire -Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical raceways penetrating floors and walls, to provide fire -stops with fire -resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.

3.6 ACOUSTICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Do not allow direct contact of raceways with shaft walls, floor slabs and/or partitions. Sleeve, pack and seal airtight with foam rod, non-hardening sealant and/or packing material, as described herein, for all penetrations by raceway, through surfaces that encompass or are between noise critical spaces. Seal and pack with caulking for the full depth of the penetration all openings around raceways in the structure surrounding the electrical equipm ent and surrounding noise - critical spaces. This includes all slab penetrations and penetrations of noise critical walls.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00-9
B. Where a raceway passes through a wall, ceiling or floor slab of a noise critical space, cast or grout a metal sleeve into the structur e. The internal diameter or dimensions of the sleeve shall be 2 inches larger than the external diameter or dimensions of the raceway passing through it.

After all of the raceways are installed in that area, check the clearances and correct, if necessary, to within 1/2 -inch. Pack the voids full depth with packing material sealed at both ends, 1 -inch deep, with non-hardening sealant backed by foam rod.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19-1
SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1. Conductors, cables, and cords rated 600V and less.

2. Connectors and terminations rated 600V and less.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

A. Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements” for general requirements and related documents that apply to this Section.

B. Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical” for sleeves and seals for electrical penetrations.

C. Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems ” for conductors and connectors for grounding systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 01 and Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements”:

1. Product data for the following products:
a. Metal Clad (MC) cable and fittings.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports : From a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
A. The following abbreviations apply to this and other Sections of these specifications:

1. MC: Metal Clad

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber
B. The following definitions apply to this and other Sections of these Specifications:

1. HOMERUN: That portion of an electrical circuit beginning at a junction box, termination box, receptacle or switch with termination at an electrical panelboard. Note: Where MC Cable is allowed to be utilized for receptacle and/or lighti ng branch circuiting loads, the originating point of the homerun shall be at the first load in the circuit or at a junction box in an accessible ceiling space immediately above the first (most upstream) load.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials shall be manufactur ed by companies that have been specializing in the products specified in this Section, for a minimum of 3 years.

B. Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, "Suitability of Test Equipment" and "Test Instrument Calibration."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19-2

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to AHJ.

2. Marked for intended use.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

B. Where a list is provided, manufacturers are listed alphabetically and not in accordan ce with any ranking or preference.

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. General

1. Manufacturers:
a. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
b. Alan Wire
c. Cerrowire
d. Colonial Wire & Cable
e. Encore Wire Corporation
f. General Cable
g. Northern Cables Inc.
h. Okonite Company
i. Southwire Company

2. Conductor Material: Annealed (soft) copper complying with ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC70 and UL Standards 44 or 83, as applicable; solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller; concentric, compressed stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger and stranded for all flexible cords, cables, and control wiring or as noted otherwise below.

3. Compact stranded, aluminum alloy (AA-8000 Series), complying with ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC70; No. [6][2] AWG or larger only.

4. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THW,THHN/THWN-2, and/or XHHW-2 complying with ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC70 or as noted otherwise below.

5. Sizes of conductors and cables indicated or specified are American Wire Gage (Brown and Sharpe).

6. Unless indicated otherwise, special purpose conductors and cables, such as low voltage control and shielded instrument wiring, shall be as recommended by the system equipment manufacturer.

7. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings.

B. Metal Clad Cable, Type MC – shall not be used on this project.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19-3
C. Flexible Cords

1. 600V, multi-conductor (2, 3, or 4 as indicated on the Drawings), oil-resistant [black][yellow] jacket, extra-hard-usage; Type [SEO,][SO,] [or] [STO] for indoor dry and damp locations; [SEOW,][SOW,] [or] [STOW] for damp, wet, and outdoor locations or as required by the manufacturer of the equipment to which the cords are connected.

2. 300V, multi-conductor (2, 3, or 4 as indicated on the Drawings), oil-resistant black jacket, hard-usage; Type SJEO, SJO, or SJTO for indoor dry locations; or as required by the manufacturer of the equipment to which the cords are connected.

CI. Control Wiring

1. Refer to Division 23 Section “Direct-Digital Control for HVAC”

2. Refer to Division 27 Section “Direct-Digital Control for HVAC”

3. Unless otherwise noted, all control wiring will be the responsibility of the Section or Division in which the control system is specified.

CII. Connectors

1. Manufacture[s:
a. AMP; Tyco
b. FCI-Burndy
c. Gould
d. Ideal Industries, Inc.
e. Ilsco
f. NSi Industries, Inc.
g. O-Z/Gedney
h. Panduit
i. Thomas and Betts
j. 3-M Electrical Products Division

2. Compression connectors for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger: Long-barreled, UL 486- listed, tinned copper, circumferential compression type (Burndy "Hylug”, or equal), insulated with clamp-on, cold-shrink, or molded covers, or wrapped with multiple over- lapping layers of 3-M Scotch electrical tape.
a. Termination fittings: 1 or 2 hole pad and inspection port.

3. Mechanical connections for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger: UL-listed, tinned copper and/or tinned aluminum, dual-rated, mechanical type, insulated with clamp-on, cold-shrink, or molded covers, or wrapped with multiple over-lapping layers of 3-M Scotch electrical tape.
a. Termination fittings: 1 or 2 hole pad and inspection port.

4. Connectors for solid conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller: Insulated winged wire nuts.

Color-coded for size, except use green only for grounding connections.

5. Connectors for stranded conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller: Tinned copper, insulated- sleeve, compression type, UL-listed, with wire insulation grip. Terminations:ring-tongue type.

6. Connectors and terminations for aluminum conductors and cables No. 1 and larger: UL 486B listed and marked AL7CU for 75 deg C rated conductors and AL9CU for 90 deg C rated conductors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. General:

1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings on in other Sections, install all conductors in raceway. Install continuous conductors between outlets, devices and boxes without splices or taps. Do not pull connections into raceways. Leave at least 8 inches of conductor at outlets for fixture or device connections.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19-4

2. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used shall not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave conductor/cable grips that will not damage conductors/cables or raceway.

4. Electrical conductor and cable work is schematically represented on the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, conductor sizes shown on the Drawings are based on not more than three single current-carrying conductors in a raceway in free air. Current ratings are based on copper at 75 degrees C temperature rating for all power circuits. Modify raceway and conductor sizing as may be necessitated by any deviation from these conditions. Do not decrease the indicated conductor size due to the use of conductors ha ving a temperature rating of 90 degrees C.

5. Conductor sizes shown are minimum based on code requirements, voltage drop, and/or other considerations. Where approved by the Engineer and at no extra cost to the Owner, larger conductor sizes may be installed at Contractor's option in order to utilize stock sizes, provided raceway sizes are increased where necessary to conform with NFPA 70 (determine the effect of the use of larger conductors on the short circuit current ratings of the electrical equipment, and provide increased short circuit current rated equipment as required).

6. Where parallel conductors are shown, install each set of conductors in separate raceways of essentially the same length.

7. Seal around cables penetrating fire -rated elements according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping".

8. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Systems".

9. Common or Shared Neutrals are not allowed unless shown on the plans or specifically noted to be allowed.

10. Multi-wire branch circuits (i.e., shared neutral) shall be provided with a means that will simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors at the point the branch circuit originates. Multi-pole breakers or 3 single pole breakers with a handle tie are two example

11. When multiple home runs are c ombined into a single raceway such that the number of conductors exceeds four (conductor count is made up of any combination of phase and neutral conductors), the following restrictions apply, which are in addition to those in NFPA 70:
a. Emergency Power C ircuits – includes all circuits covered under Articles 700, 701 and 702.
1) Maximum of eight conductors in a single raceway. Minimum raceway size:
¾-inch. Do not install any other type of circuit in this raceway. 2) Only 15A and 20A branch circuit homeruns may be combined into one raceway.
b. Normal or Non-Essential circuits.
1) Maximum of 16 conductors in a single raceway. For up to eight conductors in a raceway, minimum raceway size: 3/4 inch. For greater than eight conductors, minimum raceway size: 1 inch. Do not install any other type of circuit in this raceway.
2) The minimum wire size for all conductors in this raceway: No. 10 AWG. 3) Only 15A and 20A branch circuit homeruns may be combined into o ne raceway.
c. GFCI-protected circuits.
1) Do not use multi-conductor circuits, with a shared neutral, for any GFCI circuit breaker or receptacle circuit.

12. Where the number of conductors for branch circuits is not shown on the Drawings, determine the number of conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. Provide adequate conductors so as to allow performance of all functions of the device.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19-5

13. Provide all conductors with 600V insulation of the following types, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or in these Specifications:
a. Wet or dry locations, in raceways:
1) Service entrance: Type THWN, THHN/THWN-2, or XHHW.
2) Feeders and branch circuits: Type THWN, THHN/THWN-2, or XHHW. 3) Conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller: Types THWN or THHN/THWN-2. b. Direct buried:
1) Service entrance: USE.
2) Feeders and branch circuits: UF or USE.
c. Fluorescent light fixtures or conductors within three feet of high temperature equipment such as heaters: Type THHN, XHHW, or higher temperature insulation as required for the use.

B. Aluminum Conductor Option:

1. Terminations: Tinned, [mechanical] [compression] type only; UL-listed for copper and aluminum conductors at 75 degrees C minimum.

2. Increase the raceway size as required, at no additional cost to the Owner, to accommodate the increased size of the aluminum conductors.

3. Aluminum conductor size shall meet or exceed the ampere rating of the scheduled copper conductors at 75 degrees C.

4. Option applies only for the following feeders or services No. 2 AWG and larger (based on copper conductors):
a. Service entrance conductors
b. Feeders to switchboards
c. Feeders to panelboards
1) Exception: Apartment unit load center feeder conductors shall be copper; aluminum is not acceptable.
d. Feeders to motor control centers
e. Feeders to transformers

5. Where aluminum conductors terminate existing panelboards, switchboards or switchgear that utilize compression connections use hydraulic-compression type connectors with a zinc base, anti-oxidizing compound. Use compression tools of the type that will not release unless the correct pressure has been applied.

6. Measure the temperature of all aluminum conductors at all splices and terminations. Make each test under typical building load conditions after the building is occupied and in operation for a minimum of two weeks. Replace all joints or splices indicating excessive heating.

7. Take measurements with a non-contact type infrared thermometer, with target size not exceeding one inch at five feet and an accuracy of two percent or better. Submit the meter specifications and calibration date with the test results.

C. Metal Clad Type MC:

1. Securing and Supporting:
a. Support per Art 330 for MC cable
b. Secure cable within 12 inches of every box or fitting. c. Secure/supporting intervals shall not exceed six (6) feet for MC cable. d. Utilize steel cable hangers, Arlington SMC series or equivalent, for MC cable support wherever possible so as to provide for cable routing in a neat and workmanship like manner.

2. Type MC cable may only be used:
a. In lieu of flexible conduit and wiring from light fixtures in accessible ceilings to junction boxes (attached to building structure) above the ceiling. Provide cable whips of sufficient lengths to allow for relocating each light fixture within a 5-foot radius of its installed location, but not exceeding 6 feet in unsupported lengths. b. For vertical drops and horizontal wiring in stud walls.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19-6
c. In lieu of metal raceway , only f or 15A and 20A branch circuits with up to four (4) conductors, not including ground ing and/or bonding conductor(s) , and only in dry concealed locations above grade, except where speci fically not permitted by the NEC.

3. MC Cable shall not be used for any use not listed in the paragraph above. Examples of those uses include, but are not limited to:
a. In locations not permitted by the NEC.
b. When specifically not allowed by the local AHJ and/or Owner/Landlord. c. Homeruns to panelboards. Note: where metal clad cable is utilized for receptacle, lighting, and/or miscellaneous load branch circuiting, the ori ginating point of the homerun shall be at the first (most upstream) load in the circuit or at a junction box located in the accessible ceiling space immediately above the first (most upstream) load. Reference definitions in this section for definition on “Homerun”. d. Where exposed to view.
e. Where subject to physical damage.
f. Corrosive or Hazardous locations.
g. Wet locations.

D. Flexible Cords

1. Refer to Division 26 Section, ““Equipment Wiring Systems ”, for electrical connections to equipment.

E. Control Wiring

1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in other sections, install all control wiring in raceway, regardless of voltage. A qualified Electrician shall install all control wire operating at 120V nominal and above. Control wiring operating at less than 120V (e.g., 12V and 24V) may be installed under the Division furnishing it.

2. Open wiring in air-handling plenums: UL listed and classified for use in air plenums without raceway. Where indicated on the Drawings or specified, and permitted by local codes, only cable for communication or fire alarm systems and low volt age control wiring may be installed without raceways.

F. Connections:

1. Apply a zinc based, anti-oxidizing compound to connections.

2. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

4. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

5. Use only resin pressure splices and splicing kits that totally encapsulate the splice for splices in underground junction boxes. Arrange the splicing kit to minimize the effects of moisture.

6. Connect conductors No. 6 AWG and larger to panelboards and apparatus by means of approved mechanical lugs or compression connectors.

7. Do not use terminals on wiring devices to feed through to the next device.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Test all wiring prior to energizing to ensure that it is

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19-7
free from unintentional grounds and shorts, is properly phased, and that all connectors are tight.

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3. Certify compliance with test parameters.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26-1
SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.

B. This Section includes:

1. Grounding Conductors

2. Connector Products

3. Grounding Electrodes

4. Ground Bars

5. Equipotential Grounding System

6. Miscellaneous Grounding Materials and Products

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

A. Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements” for general requirements and related documents that apply to this section.

B. Division 26 Section " Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ” for insulated conductors.

C. Division 26 Section “Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for raceways.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 01 and Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements”:

1. Product data for the following products:
a. Electrodes, mechanical and compression connectors, and exothermic connectors .

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor.

C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor.

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve tes t results that comply with requirements.

D. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings as required by Division 01 and Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements”:

1. Accurately record actual locations of all exterior buried electrodes and all buried groun d rings. Indicate dimensions from fixed structural elements.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. The following apply to this and other Sections of these Specifications:

1. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

2. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

3. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

4. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26-2

5. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

6. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

7. RMC: Rigid Metal Conduit

8. GRS: Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

9. RAC: Rigid Aluminum Conduit

10. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

11. PSF: Pounds per Square Foot

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials shall be manufactured by companies that have been specializing in the products specified in this Section, for a minimum of 3 years.

B. Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS (current version), "Suitability of Test Equipment" and "Test Instrument Calibration."
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Marked for intended use.

3. Comply with UL 467.

E. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead -line construction and medium -voltage underground construction, comply with IEEE C2.

F. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

B. Where a list is provided, manufacturers are listed alphabetically and not in accordance with any ranking or preference.

2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS, CONNECTORS, AND ELECTRODES:

A. Manufacturers:

1. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc.

2. Boggs, Inc.

3. Chance/Hubbell.

4. Copperweld Corp.

5. Dossert Corp.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26-3

6. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.

7. FCI/Burndy Electrical.

8. Galvan Industries, Inc.

9. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.

10. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc.

11. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.

12. Ideal Industries, Inc.

13. ILSCO.

14. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.

15. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries.

16. Lightning Master Corp.

17. Lyncole XIT Grounding.

18. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.

19. Panduit, Inc

20. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.

21. Robbins Lightning, Inc.

22. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co.

23. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc.

24. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.

2.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical." B. Material: Aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, and copper.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Bare, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Underground Conductors: Bare copper conductor, No . 2/0 AWG minimum stranded unless otherwise indicated.

F. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

G. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:

1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.

3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (wide and 1/16 inch thick.

H. Aluminum Bonding Conductors: As follows:

1. Bonding Cable: 10 strands of No. 14 AWG aluminum conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded aluminum conductor.

3. Bonding Jumper: Aluminum tape, braided bare aluminum conductors, terminated with aluminum ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

I. Ground Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: As follows:

1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper conductor.

2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-treated fir, or cypress or cedar.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26-4
J. Grounding Bus: UL & cUL Listed to UL467 & C22.2 respectively, pre-drilled per TIA/EIA Standard 607 , bare, 1/4 inch thick, electrolytic, tough pitch copper bar, length and width as indicated on the Drawings; insulators and standoffs as specified in Paragraph “Ground Bars” below.

2.4 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors

1. Compression Connectors: Burndy Hyground, or equal, permanent, pure, wrought copper, meeting ASTM 8 1 87, essentially the same as the conductors being connected; clearly and permanently marked with the information listed below:
a. Company symbol and/or logo.
b. Catalog number.
c. Conductors accommodated.
d. Installation die index number or die catalog number is required. e. Underwriters Laboratories “Listing Mark:”.
f. The words “Suitable for Direct Burial” or, where spac e is limited, “Direct Burial” or “Burial” per UL Standard ANSI/UL467 (latest revision).

2. Cast connectors: copper base alloy according to ASTM B 30 (latest revision).

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions.

EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding connections are to be made and notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.

Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Provide all materials, labor and equipment for an electrical grounding system in accordance with applicable portions of the NEC and NECA. Coordinate electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding systems with other work.

C. Accomplish grounding and bonding of electrical installations and specific requirements for systems, circuits and equipment required to be grounded for both temporary and permanent construction.

3.2 APPLICATION
A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grou nding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

B. In branch circuit and feeder raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

C. Underground Grounding Conductors: Bury at least 24 inches below grade, or 6 inches below the official frost line, whichever is greater, or when crossing a duct bank, bury 12 inches above duct bank.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26-5

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits.

C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Lighting circuits.

3. Receptacle circuits.

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

6. Flexible raceway runs.

7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

8. Feeders and branch circuits installed in non-metallic raceways.

D. Separately Derived Systems: Bond the derived neutral (grounded) conductor of all separately derived system (e.g., transformers, generators, UPS) to the nearest available grounding electrode, or back to the service grounding electrode if no approved electrodes are readily available. Size the grounding electrode conductor and bonding jumpers as i ndicated on the Drawings or as required by NFPA 70, whichever is larger.

E. Busway Supply Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor from the grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panelboard to the equipment groundin g bar terminal on the busway, if a direct bus-to-bus connection is not factory provided.

Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct -mounted electrical devices operating at 120V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.

3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Where the size of the grounding conductors are not shown, size in accordance with NFPA 70 Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect -type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.

3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. Provide electrical bonding plates, connectors, terminals, lugs and clamps as recommended by the manufacturers for indicated application s. Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, and bonding straps as recommended by the manufacturers for types of service indicated.

1. Use electroplated or hot -tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity an d to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26-6

3. Make aluminum -to-steel connections with stainless -steel separators and mechanical clamps.

4. Make aluminum -to-galvanized steel connectio ns with tin -plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.

5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's writte n instructions. Replace welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning. Use exothermic welded connections for the following:

1. Connecting conductors together.

2. Connecting conductors to ground rods, except at test wells.

3. Connecting conductors to building steel.

4. Connecting conductors to plates.

C. Compression Fittings: Permanent compression-type fittings may be used for the following rather than exothermic connections:

1. Connecting conductors together.

2. Connecting conductors to building steel.

3. Connecting conductors to ground rods, except at test wells.

D. Mechanical Pressure Fittings: Use bolted mechanical (removable) pressure -type clamps for the following:

1. Connecting conductors to ground rods at test wells.

2. Connecting conductors to pipes.

E. Equipment Grounding Conductor T erminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure -type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

F. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal hou sings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits a t entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression -type connectors on conductors and make bolted - and clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.

H. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

I. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

J. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground -resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26-7
wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by the fall -of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affec t test results.

Describe measures taken to improve test results.

4. Test Values:
a. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and earth ground shall be no greater than 10 ohms.
b. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
c. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
d. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
e. Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms. f. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

5. Perform point–to–point megohmmeter tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and/or derived neutral points.

6. Minimum system neutral–to-ground insulation resistance: one megohm.

7. Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohms. a. Check for loose connections.
b. Check for absent or broken connections.
c. Check for poor quality welds.
d. Consider other reasons.

8. Excessive Grounding Electrode Resistance: If measured resistance to earth ground value exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations and costs to reduce them.

3.7 GRADING AND PLANTING
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.

Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is com pleted. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Division 31 and 32. Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29-1
SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

A. Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements” for general requirements and related documents that apply to this Section.

B. Division 26 Section “Common Work Res ults for Electrical” for concrete pads for pad -mounted service transformers.

C. Division 23 Section, “Seismic Restraints for Mechanical and Electrical Equipment” for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

D. Division 26 Section "Vibration And Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of fivetimes the applied force.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29-2

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA -4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester c oating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory -formed, glass -fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16 -inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requireme nts, provide products by one of the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited.
d. Seasafe, Inc.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and an gle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles , except metal items may be stainless steel.

4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29-3
G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) Hilti Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size sha ll be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17
.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29-4

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2- inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard -weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight -aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted -channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site - fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors w ill be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29-5
B. Use 3000-psi (20.7 -MPa), 28-day compressive -strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section " Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions fur nished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with re quirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted conn ections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33-1
SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL REQUREMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1. Raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

A. Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements” for general requirements and related documents that apply to this Section.

B. Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical” for limited scope general construction materials and methods.

C. Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding”.

D. Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems”.

E. Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for supports, anchors, concrete bases, seismic restraints and bracing of raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

F. Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Systems”.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 01 and Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements”.

B. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings as required by Division 01 and Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements”:

1. Accurately record actual routing of all exterior buried raceway and all interior raceways three inches and larger. Indicate dimensions from fixed structural elements.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members in path of conduit groups with supports.

2. HVAC items, plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology used in this specification is as defined below:

1. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing

2. FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit

3. GRS: Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

4. IMC: Intermediate Metal Conduit

5. LFMC: Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit

6. LFNC: Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit

7. RAC: Rigid Aluminum Conduit

8. RMC: Rigid Metal Conduit

9. RNC: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33-2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials shall be manufactured by companies that have been spe cializing in the products specified in this Section, for a minimum of 3 years.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to AHJ.

2. Marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

B. Where a list is provided, manufacturers are listed alphabetically and not in accordance with any ranking or preference.

2.2 CONDUITS, SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAYS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Conduit And Tubing

1. Manufacturers:
a. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
b. Alflex Corporation, a Southwire Company
c. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
d. Electri-Flex Co.
e. Indalex
f. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex
g. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal (Fittings)
h. Republic Raceway
i. Tyco International; Allied Tube & Conduit Div.
j. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation
k. Wheatland Tube Co.

2. RMC:
a. GRS: Hot-dip galvanized: ANSI C80.1, UL 6.
b. RAC: ANSI C80.5, UL6A.

3. IMC: ANSI C80.6, UL 1242.

4. Plastic-Coated GRS and Fittings: NEMA RN 1, UL-listed. Coating thickness of 0.04 inches (1mm), minimum.

5. Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1, UL-listed.

6. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3, UL 797.
a. Fittings: Set-screw or compressiontype.

7. FMC: Aluminum or [Zinc-coated steel: UL 1.

8. LFMC: Flexible steel raceway with PVC jacket: UL 360. a. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with raceway and tubing materials.

B. Nonmetallic Raceway:

1. Manufacturers:
a. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. (Tubing)
b. American International.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33-3
c. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
d. Arnco Corp.
e. Cantex Inc.
f. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
g. Condux International.
h. ElecSYS, Inc.
i. Electri-Flex Co.
j. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
k. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
l. Prime Conduit (formerly Carlon)
m. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
n. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
o. Superflex Ltd.
p. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

2. RNC: Schedule 40 and 80 PVC: NEMA TC 2, UL 651.
a. Fittings: match to raceway type and material: NEMA TC 3, NEMA TC 6, UL 651, as applicable.

C. Metal Wireways

1. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line
b. EPI-Electrical Enclosures
c. Hoffman.
d. Square D.

2. Material and Construction: 14 gauge (minimum) sheet steel, sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA rating as required for environment.

3. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70. Where indicated, provide a barrier to divide wireway into compartments.

4. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard phosphate pre-treatment and baked enamel finish.

D. Nonmetallic Wireways

1. Manufacturers:
a. Enduro Composite Systems
b. Hoffman.
c. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

2. Description: Fiberglass reinforced polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Gasketed cover with oil -resistant gasket material and fastened with corrosion resistance captive screws; flanged connections, with stainless- steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

3. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.

4. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

5. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
A. General

1. Manufacturers:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33-4
a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. b. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company.
c. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
d. Hoffman.
e. Hubbell, Inc.
f. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
g. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
h. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
i. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
j. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division.
k. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
l. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
m. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
n. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary B. Junction and Pull Boxes

1. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

2. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: For metal wireway and surface raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled metal wireway and surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAYS
A. General

1. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to produc ts specified in Part 2 except where requirements on drawings or in this article are stricter.

2. Provide sizes and types of raceways as indicated on the Drawings. Sizes are based on THWN insulated copper conductors, except where noted otherwise. Where sizes are not shown on the Drawings o r in the Specifications, size raceways in accordance with NFPA 70 requirements for the number, size and type of conductors installed. Minimum raceway size: 1/2 inch (concealed and exposed); 1 inch (underground and under slab).

3. Provide all raceways, fittin gs, supports, and miscellaneous hardware required for a complete electrical system as described by the Drawings and Specifications.

4. Install a green-insulated, equipment-grounding conductor, which is bonded to the electrical system ground, in all raceways, with the exception of Service Entrance raceways.

5. Install grounding bushings on all conduit terminations and bond to the enclosure, equipment grounding conductor, and electrical system ground.

6. Install raceways concealed in walls or above suspended ceilings in finished areas. When approved by the Architect, raceways may be installed concealed in elevated flo or slabs.

Do not install raceways horizontally within slabs on grade.

7. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

8. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot -water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

9. Make bends and offsets so inside diameters are not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

10. Install raceways:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33-5
a. To meet the requirements of the structure and the requirements of all other Work on the Project.
b. To clear all openings, depressions, ducts, pipes, reinforcing steel, and so on. c. Within or passing through the concrete structure in such a manner so as not to adversely affect the integrity of the structure. Become familiar with the Architectural and the Structural Drawings and their requirements affecting the raceway installation. If necessary, consult with the Architect. d. Parallel or perpendicular to building lines or column lines. e. When concealed, with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical dista nce, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.

11. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches of concrete cover.
a. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement.
b. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. c. Run conduit larger than 1 -inch trade size parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, plac e conduit close to slab support.
d. Change from RNC to coated GRS or IMC before rising above the floor.

12. Where masonry walls are left unfinished, coordinate raceway installations with other trades so that the raceways and boxes are concealed and the wall will have a neat and smooth appearance.

13. Support raceways from structural elements o f the building as required by NFPA 70 , Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems”, and per Division 26 Section “ Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems ” and per Division 23 Section, “Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”. Do not support raceways by hangers used for any other systems foreign to the electrical systems; and, do not attach to other foreign systems. Do not lay raceways on top of the ceiling system.

14. Provide support spacing in accordance with NFPA 7 0 requirements, and at a minimum in accordance with NEMA standards. Support by the following methods:
a. Attach single raceway directly to structural steel with beam clamps. b. Attach single raceway directly to concrete with one -hole clamps or clips and anchors. Outdoors and wherever subject to dampness or moisture, offset raceways from the surface by using galvanized clamps and clamp backs, to mitigate moisture entrapment between raceways and surfaces.
c. Attach groups of raceway to structural steel with slotted support system attached with beam clamps. Attach raceway to slotted channel with approved raceway clamps.
d. Attach groups of raceway to concrete with cast -in-place steel slotted channel fabricated specifically for concrete embedment. Attach raceway to steel slotted channel with approved raceway clamps.
e. Hang plumb horizontally suspended single raceway using a threaded rod. Attach threaded rods to concrete with anchors and to structural steel with beam clamps.

Attach raceway to threaded rod with approved raceway clamps. f. Hang horizontally suspended groups of raceway using steel slotted support system suspended from threaded rods. Attach threaded rods to concrete with anchors and to structural steel with beam clamps. Attach raceway to steel slotted channel wit h approved raceway clamps.
g. Support conductors in vertical raceway in accordance with NFPA 70 requirements. h. Cross-brace suspended raceway to prevent lateral movement during seismic activity.
i. Use pre-fabricated non-metallic spacers for parallel runs of under ground or under- slab conduits, either direct buried or encased in concrete.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33-6

15. Install electrically - and physically -continuous raceways between connections to outlets, boxes, panelboards, cabinets, and other electrical equipment with a minimum possible number of bends and not more than the equivalent of four 90 -degree bends between boxes. Make bends smooth and even, without flattening raceway or flaking the finish.

16. Protect all electrical Work against damage during construction. Repair all Work damaged or moved out of line after rough-in, to meet the Architect’s approval, without additional cost to the Owner. Cover or temporarily plug openings in boxes or raceways to keep raceways clean during construction. Clean all raceways prior to pulling conductors or c ables.

17. Align and install raceway terminations true and plumb.

18. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

19. Install a pull cord in each empty raceway that is left empty for installation of wires or cables by other trades or under separate contracts. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 -lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull cord.

20. Install approved expansion/deflection fittings where raceways pass through or over building expansion joints.

21. Route raceway through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through roof seals approved by the Architect, the roofing contractor, or both. Obtain approval for all roof penetrations and seal types from the Architect, Own er, roofing contractor, or all three as required to maintain new or existing roofing warranties.

22. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:
a. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces or from building exterior to building interior.
b. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

23. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with GRS FMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver -operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.

B. RMC

1. Use GRS or IMC in the following areas:
a. Where indicated.
b. Exterior applications where above grade and exposed. c. Below grade when concrete -encased, plastic-coated, or provided with a corrosion resistant approved mastic coating.
d. All raceways penetrating slabs on grade (use plastic-coated raceway or provide with a corrosion resistant approved mastic coating). This shall include the 90 -degree elbow below grade and the entire vertical transition to above grade.

2. Use RAC in the following areas:
a. Indoors above grade.
b. Interior wet or damp locations.
c. For circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

3. Do not use RAC:
a. Below grade.
b. Imbedded in concrete or other areas corrosive to RAC.

C. EMT

1. Use EMT in the following areas:
a. Where indicated.
b. Interior concealed locations for:
1) Branch and feeder circuits.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33-7
2) Low-voltage control, security, and fire alarm circuits

2. Do not use EMT:
a. Below grade.
b. In exterior applications when exposed.

D. FMC and LFMC

1. Use FMC or LFMC:
a. For the final 24 inches of raceway to all motors, transformers, and other equipment subject to vibration or movement.
b. From outlet boxes (attached to building structure) to re cessed light fixtures. Install sufficient length to allow for relocating each light fixture within a 5 -foot radius of its installed location.

2. Do not use FMC or LFMC:
a. For branch circuits, homeruns or feeders.
b. In lengths exceeding 6 feet.

3. Use FMC only in dry locations; use LFMC in damp, wet, corrosive, and outdoor locations E. RNC

1. Solvent-weld RNC fittings and raceway couplings per the manufacturer’s instructions and make all connections watertight. Use solvent of the same manufacturer as the raceway.

2. Where installed exposed outdoors or other areas subject to temperature variations, install expansion fittings per Article 352.44 of NFPA 70, to accommodate thermal expansion in straight runs.

3. Use RNC in the following locations:
a. Only where specifically indicated, and then only as specified below. b. Underground, single and grouped, in lieu of GRS or IMC, when indicated. 1) Direct buried
2) Concrete-encased (use approved rigid PVC interlocking spacers, selected to provide minimum duct spacing and cover depths indicated while supporting ducts during concreting and backfilling; produced by the same manufacturer as the ducts).

4. Do not use RNC:
a. Exposed indoors
b. In occupied spaces.
c. In return air plenums.
d. Where subject to physical damage.
e. Where not permitted by codes.

F. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. RMC and IMC: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings and installation tools approved by the manufacturer for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits. Replace all fittings and conduits that have any portion of the coating scraped off to bare metal, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.

4. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors at raceway terminations:
a. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part agains t box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box.
b. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

G. Telephone and Signal/Data System Raceways, 2 -Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33-8
90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.

H. Wireways

1. Use flat head screws, clips an d straps to fasten wireways to surfaces. Mount plumb and level.

2. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.

3. Close ends of wireway and unused raceway openings.

I. Surface Raceways

1. Use flat head screws, clips and straps to fasten surface raceways to surfaces. Mount plumb and level.

2. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.

3. Close ends of surface raceway.

3.2 BOXES
A. General

1. Verify locations of device boxes prior to rough in.

2. Set boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as specified or indicated on the Drawings.

3. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

Adjust box locations to accommodate intended purpose.

4. Install boxes to preserve fire ratings of walls, floors, and ceilings.

5. Install flush wall -mounted boxes without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

6. Support boxes independently of raceway.

7. Clean the interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

8. Adjust flush-mounted boxes to make front edges flush with finished wall material.

9. Provide boxes of the depth required for the service, device and the application, and with raised covers set flush with the finished wall surface for boxes concealed in plaster finishes.

Select covers with the proper openings for the devices being installed in the boxes. Install boxes flush unless otherwise indicated.

B. Junction and Pull Boxes

1. Install junction and pull boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas.

2. Provide boxes set flush in painted walls or ceilings with primer coated cover.

3. Where junction and pull boxes are installed above an inaccessible ceiling, locate so as to be easily accessible from a ceiling access panel.

4. Boxes for exterior use shall be:
a. PVC with a UV-stabilized PVC cover sealed and gasketed watertight. b. Cast aluminum with a cast aluminum cover sealed and gasketed watertight. c. Cast iron with cast iron cover sealed and gasketed watertight in vehicular traffic areas. Provide box and cover UL listed for use in vehicular traffic areas. d. Install buried boxes so that box covers are flush with grade, unless indicated otherwise.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 48-1
SECTION 26 05 48 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section includes general seismic requirements specific other sections of the Division 26 specifications.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. The IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.

1.3 SUMMARY
A. Seismic bracing, restraints, and controls for a ll electrical systems specified herein shall be designed and installed as required by Division 20 Section “Seismic Controls for MEP/F/T Systems”.

B. The following equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions. The equipment will remain in pla ce without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified:

1. Panelboards used in normal power systems

2. Raceways and Boxes used in normal power systems

3. Low-Voltage Transformers used in normal power systems

4. Switchboards used in normal power systems

5. Panelboards used in normal power systems
C. In addition to the requirements above, the following equipment shall be fully operational after the seismic event:

1. Panelboards used in emergency power systems

2. Raceways and Boxes used in emergency power systems

3. Low-Voltage Transformers used in emergency power systems

4. Switchboards used in emergency power systems

5. Panelboards used in emergency power systems

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals as required by Division 20 S ection “Seismic Controls for MEP/F/T Systems” for all electrical systems specified herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
(Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(Not used)

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53-1
SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Nameplates

2. Labels for raceways and metal-clad cable.

3. Labels for junction boxes and pull boxes.

4. Labels for wiring devices and lighting control devices.

5. Markers for conductors, and control cables.

6. Tags.

7. Underground-line warning tape.

8. Warning labels and signs.

9. Arc Flash Warning Labels.

10. Instruction signs.

11. Miscellaneous identification products.

12. Painted Identification.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Where a facility identification standard already exists, that standar d shall be continued. Where an identification standard does not exist, color -coding and identification shall be as described herein.

B. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

D. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

E. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit the following in accordance with Division 01 and Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements” for each electrical identification product indicated:

1. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.

2. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Marked for intended use.

B. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53-2
C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Location, text, and method of identification to be used is noted in individual sections . Refer to related sections for additional identification requirements.

2.2 NAMEPLATES
A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label, adhesive backed. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. For elevated components, increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

1. Normal systems - white letters on a black background.

2. Emergency systems - white letters on a red background

2.3 LABELS FOR RACEWAYS AND METAL-CLAD CABLE
A. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather - and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for secu ring ends of legend label.

B. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

C. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid -colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, wat erproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.4 LABELS FOR JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES
A. Junction box and pull box covers shall be spray painted to identify the voltage and system. Circuit numbers and the panel they originate from shall be listed on the cover using permanent, waterproof, black ink marker.

2.5 LABELS FOR WIRING DEVICES AND LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES A. Self-laminating Computer Printable Labels: Clear over-laminate to protect legend for permanent, clean identification. Self-laminating Polyester material with white print-on area.

B. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label : adhesive backed. Minimum letter height shall be 3/16 inch (4.76 mm).

1. Normal systems - white letters on a black background.

2. Emergency systems - white letters on a red background C. Engraved cover plates : Provide with white letters . White or ivory cover plates shall have black letters.

D. Permanent Ink: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker, hand printed legibly.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53-3

2.6 MARKERS FOR CONDUCTOR AND CONTROL CABLES
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self -adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

C. Self-laminating Computer Printable Labels: Clear over-laminate to protect legend for permanent, clean identification. Self-laminating Polyester material with white print-on area.

D. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014-inch- (0.35-mm-) thick aluminum sheet, with stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.

E. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking nylon tie fastener.

2.7 TAGS
A. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2.8 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.

1. Not less than 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.102 mm) thick.

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.

3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.

4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.

2.9 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. Attachment method shall be acceptable to the manufacturers of the equipment to which the nameplates are being applied and shall not compromise any NRTL listing or labeling criteria.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and s ize required for application. 1/4 -inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather -resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose - acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning (208 Volts): "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53-4

3. Workspace Clearance Warning (480 Volts): "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 48 INCHES (915 MM)."

2.10 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS
A. 3.5 in. x 5 in., unless otherwise noted by Owner, thermal transfer type label of high adhesion polyester for each work location analyzed.

B. All labels will be based on recommended overcurrent device settings and will be printed after the results of the analysis have been presented and after any syste m changes, upgrades, or modifications have been incorporated in the system.

C. The label shall include the following information, at a minimum:

1. Location designation

2. Nominal voltage

3. Available fault current

4. Flash protection boundary

5. Hazard risk category

6. Incident energy

7. Working distance

8. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date.

D. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings.

2.11 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. Unless indicated otherwise, provide with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters.

1. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

2. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

3. Normal systems: Engraved legend with white letters on black face.

4. Essential Systems: Engraved legend with white letters on red face.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.6 kg), minimum.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).

4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

B. Fasteners for Nameplates, Labels and Signs

1. Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless -steel machine screws with nuts and flat lock washers unless otherwise noted.

2.13 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION
A. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

1. Exterior Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
a. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer. 1) Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semi-gloss acrylic enamel.

2. Exterior Concrete Unit Masonry:
a. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a block filler.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53-5
1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semi-gloss acrylic enamel.

3. Exterior Ferrous Metal:
a. Semi-gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer. 1) Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semi-gloss alkyd enamel.

4. Exterior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):
a. Semi-gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer. 1) Primer: Exterior zinc-coated metal primer.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semi-gloss alkyd enamel.

5. Interior Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
a. Semi-gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer. 1) Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semi-gloss alkyd enamel.

6. Interior Concrete Unit Masonry:
a. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a block filler. 1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semi-gloss acrylic enamel.

7. Interior Gypsum Board:
a. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer. 1) Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semi-gloss acrylic enamel.

8. Interior Ferrous Metal:
a. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer. 1) Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semi-gloss acrylic enamel.

9. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):
a. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer. 1) Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semi-gloss acrylic enamel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: C lean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

C. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting sections.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. For surfaces that require finish work, apply identification devices after completing finish work.

C. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

D. Attach non-adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate.

E. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53-6
F. Equipment Nameplates and Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consist ent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual
G. For refrigeration systems: Neatly bundle circuits and clearly tag and label each circuit with panelboard, branch circuit designation and refrigeration system number at each terminati on.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-1
SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Included in the work of this section are labor, material, and appurtenances required to complete the work of this Section as specified herein, including, but not limited to:

1. Interior light fixtures, lamps, LEDs, reflectors, lenses or faceplates, ballasts, transformers, drivers and power supplies (includes exterior light fixtures normally installed on exterior surfaces of buildings).

2. Lighting control panel(s) in the corridor are to be utilized and with control software upgrades, integration with new touchscreens for scence control.

3. Lights will be tied into existing Lutron lighting system along with integration desktop management system.

4. Light fixture supports.

5. Removal and disposal of light fixtures that are replaced.

6. Coordination.

7. Quality assurances.

8. Specific requirements.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

1.3 A. Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements” for general requirements and related documents that apply to this Section.

B. Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical” for raceways, conductors, cables, and cords.

SUBMITTALS
A. General:

1. Only those light fixtures and manufacturers per each fixture type designated and listed in the Light Fixture Schedule or on the Drawings, and approved in accordance with paragraph

1.4-SUBSTITUTIONS of this Section, or both, will be accepted. Where the Lig ht Fixture Schedule indicates an allowance to be made for a specific light fixture, the price is a contractor price and monies shall be allotted for freight, installation, and lamping (if designated). Alternate manufacturers presented at bid shall be disqualified.

2. Submit all light fixtures, specified for use on this Project, in a single submittal package of portfolios, so that all light fixtures can be reviewed at one time.

3. Prepare portfolios from manufacturer's standard specification sheets, and include the fixture tag indicated on the Light Fixture Schedule to identify each light fixture. Do not combine more than one light fixture type on a single sheet.

4. Fixture or other materials shall not be shipped, stored, or installed into the work without approval of shop drawings.

5. Modifications to fixtures shall be in accordance with Architect’s comments.

B. Product Data: For each type of light fixture, collated and bound in sets, and arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Summary page with the following for each light fixture type a. The number, type and wattage of the light fixture lamps or LEDs (including, but not limited to, assemblies, arrays, bars or modules).
b. Light fixture ballast, driver or auxiliary device manufacturer, number and type.

2. Fixture cut sheets with name of manufacturer and options to be provided marked, including, but not limited to, voltage, lensing, and finish/color.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-2
a. Descriptive information providing physical characteristics of light fixture, including , but not limited to, materials, dimensions, fixture efficacy and/or efficiency, and verification of indicated parameters.
b. For LED fixtures, include also L70 lifetime and wattage of luminaire including driver/power supply losses.
1) Include MacAdam ellipse step information for:
a) All interior light fixtures
b) Exterior luminaires installed on exterior building surfaces specified with 80 CRI or greater.

3. Light fixture mounting details, including non-standard outlet boxes.

4. Construction of light fixture housing and door (if applicable).

5. Ballast cut sheet with options marked, providing physical description of ballast including , but not limited to, voltage, lamp, ballast factor, power factor, amperage and wattage.

6. Power supply, transformer, and/or driver cut sheet with options marked, providing physical description of auxiliary device including, but not limited to, voltage, power factor, amperage, wattage, and maximum remote distance charts between device and light fixture.

7. Light fixture finish and color (if applicable).

8. Photometric data, in IESNA format, including LM -79 for LED luminaires, based on laboratory tests of each light fixture type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the light fixture as applied in this Project. a. For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by the manufacturer.
b. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

C. Shop Drawings: Show details of non -standard or custom light fixtures. Indicate dimensions, finish color, including, but not limited to, custom color, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, accessories, and modifications. Scaled documents shall be provided for custom fixtures.

D. Submittal Schedule

1. Within 30 days of Division 26 contractor awar d, shop drawings covering all light fixtures within this section shall be forwarded to architect to begin approval process. Any shop drawings submitted after the required time frame will require the contractor to submit only the 1st named manufacturer and associated specification data listed on the fixture schedule as the only approved manufacturer. No substitutions will be allowed after the specified time frame.

2. Within 15 days of “approved” and “approved as noted” shop drawings, contractor shall forward to Architect a guaranteed ship date for each specified fixture.

3. Within 15 days after contractor’s receipt of “reject and resubmit” or “not approved” shop drawings, contractor shall provide Architect with resubmitted shop drawings for only those fixtures deemed unacceptable.

4. Contractor is responsible to call to the attention of the Architect any submittals that have not been returned to him in a timely manner that may affect delivery of fixtures or as otherwise affecting Section 1.4.D of this specification.

E. Control Wiring
F. Coordination Drawings: Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plans or details for exact location of light fixtures; engineering documents shall not be referenced for exact fixture positions.

Contractor shall check and verify dimensions and details on drawings before proceeding with the work. If any question arises about the true meaning of drawings, refer the matter to the Architect, whose decision is final. In no case proceed with work with any uncertainty. Architectural documents shall show and coordinate with assistance from installers of items involved:

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-3

1. Light fixtures.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

3. Structural members to which suspension systems for light fixtures will be attached.

4. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

5. Air outlets and inlets.

6. Speakers.

7. Sprinklers.

8. Smoke and fire detectors.

9. Occupancy sensors.

10. Access panels.

11. Perimeter moldings.

G. Samples for Verification : For products designated for sample submission in Light Fixture Schedule, or at the request of Owner or Architect . Each sample shall include lamps , LEDs, ballasts and/or drivers. Sample shall be exact light fixture intended to be supplied for the project and equipped with 120-277V universal voltage and 120V cord and plug. Provide with pendant or wall support system if appropriate.

H. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi -level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer.

I. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for light fixtures.

J. Field quality-control test reports.

K. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

L. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements”.

B. Prior to the Bid Date, substitutions will not be considered unless the Architect/Engineer have received written request for approval at leas t ten calendar days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Include in each such request the Light Fixture Schedule designation, name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and complete Product Data for the proposed substitute, as d efined in SUBMITTALS above , and all other information necessary for an evaluation. Provide interior point -by-point photometric calculations, under both normal and emergency lighting conditions, as applicable, if required by the Engineer. Submit a $100.00 review fee to the Engineer with each such point -by-point calculation for use of electronic base files. The fee will be returned if the substitution is added to the specification.

C. During the Bid

1. Any proprietary, sole-sourced light fixture listed in the fixture schedule shall be unit priced only. Unit prices shall be clearly identified on the bid form.

2. Representative agents shall be allowed to offer mini -lot pricing (MLP). MLP shall be defined as:
a. Agents can group only specified fixtures they represent, and b. Only represent in the region where the specification originated, and c. Exclude all fixtures outside their represented lines from the MLP, and d. Sole-sourced (proprietary) light fixtures shall not be included in the MLP.

3. Packaging of light fixtures will n ot be considered nor approved. Packaging is defined as:
distributor(s) providing a single price for a light fixture package made up of specified and non-specified light fixtures. Any submittal package containing non -specified light fixtures or inclusion of lighting control systems will be immediately rejected in its entirety.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-4
D. After the Bid Date, proposals to substitute light fixture s for those shown on the Drawings or specified herein, will only be considered as a deduct. Submit proposed substitutions s eparately, in Submittal form, with a list of proposed substitutions together with a deduct price for each substitution. Proposed substitutions will then be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer.

E. During the construction period, no substitutions shall be con sidered if product delay is due to contractor’s failure to order products in a timely manner after presentation of fixture schedules and specifications. Additional costs associated with air freight or special factory runs to meet schedule due to contractor’s error shall be at the expense of contractor.

F. The Architect/Engineer has the final authority as to whether the light fixture is an acceptable replacement to the specified item. The proposed substitution may also be rejected for aesthetic reasons if felt necessary or desirable. In the event the proposed substitutions herein described are rejected, provide the specified item(s).

1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature
C. CFL: Compact Fluorescent
D. CRI: Color-rendering index.

E. CU: Coefficient of utilization.

F. EISA: Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007.

G. HID: High-intensity discharge.

H. L70: minimum 70% maintained initial-rated lumens at average rated life for LEDs I. LED: Light Emitting Diode
J. LED Lamp: R eplaceable LED light source with an integral driver within envelope of lamp.

Lamp/Base types may include MR16/bi-pin, PAR/medium base, etc.

K. LED Module: Light source that contains LEDs, and may include additional components such as lenses, reflectors, or refractors, however do not include drivers.

L. LER: Light fixture (Luminaire) efficiency rating.

M. Light Fixture: Complete light fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

N. RCR: Room cavity ratio.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Progra m for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

D. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-5
E. Regulatory Agencies: Provide fixtures conforming to nationally - or internationally -recognized accredited testing agencies, such as U.S., ETL, ARL, or others in acceptance with local code enforcement policy.

F. Electrical Components and Devices: Provide only fixtures that comply with National Electric Code (NEC), and in particular to Section 410. All ceiling recessed fixtures, whether indicated in a catalog number or not, shall be equipped with an integral thermal protection device.

G. FMG Compliance: Light fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FMG.

H. Mockups: Provide interior light fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections.

1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations. Costs shall not be added to the base bid if Owner or Architect does not approve mockup.

2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work and documenting of final conditions.

3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Unless otherwise noted, perform all electrical Work required for the proper installation and operation of equipment, furnishings, devices and systems specified in other Divisions of these Specifications, furnished under other contracts, and/or furnished by the Owner for installation under this Contract.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of light fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including , but not limited to, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. Contractor shall arrange his i nstallation in proper relation to other work so that there shall be no interference, damage or delay to other trades’ work
C. Give ample notice of any special openings or rough-in work required for placing electrical/lighting work so as to avoid cutting or removal of completed work.

D. Where work of this Section is to be flush or concealed, install it so it does not project beyond finished lines of walls, ceilings or floor surface.

E. Verify all ceiling systems and coordinate light fixture type and accessories prio r to ordering light fixtures. Coordinate and cooperate with ceiling installer in regards to the location and installation of light fixtures.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Guarantee: For a period of one year after Owner’s initial acceptance and establishment of the beginning date of the guarantee period, and at no cost to the Owner, Contractor shall promptly furnish and install replacements for any fixtures or components deemed by t he Owner as defective in workmanship under normal operating conditions, excluding lamp replacement as noted in Section 1.10.A.1. Contractor shall repair installed equipment on the job site to Owner’s satisfaction. For any time during said guarantee perio d that fixtures are not fully functional due to defects in material or workmanship, Contractor shall provide or pay for suitable temporary light fixtures, an d shall remove said temporary fixtures upon installation of replacement elements.

Contractor shall furthermore guarantee replacement fixtures for a period of one year following replacement.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-6
B. Contractor shall not be held responsible for damage of fixtures or equipment components occurring after the beginning of the guarantee period due to acts of vandali sm, acts of war, or acts of God.

C. LED Warranties: Shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the period indicated from date of factory shipment.

1. LED Luminaires, including LED modules, arrays and drivers: Five years.

2. LED Lamps: Three years.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Additional light fixtures and accessories as scheduled on the Drawings.

B. Where light fixtures are specified with tamper proof hardware, provide the Owner with three tools for each different type of hardware.

1.10 SPARES
A. Furnish spare materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Drivers: 2 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In Light Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each light fixture is based on the product named.

Subject to compliance w ith requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified that meets or exceed s performance characteristics of the named product.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. No substitutions shall be allowed as per Section 1.4.

3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but ar e not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 LIGHT FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide light fixtures as shown on the drawings and/or specified. This shall include all lamps, material and labor to securely hang light fixtures, clean them and make them completely ready for use. Provide all hangers, supports, and miscellaneous hardware required to install light fixtures. Provide additional tie wires connected to structure to conform to applicable seismic requirements where required.

B. Light fixture models scheduled on the Drawings are to show the manufacturer, grade and style of light fixtures required. Regardless of the manufacturer's catalog number suffixes indicated, provide all options and features as described in the Light Fixture Schedule.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-7
C. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

Manufacturer of recessed fixtures shall provide mounting brackets suitable for connection to ceiling system structure. Modifications to standard mountin g brackets shall be coordinated with contractor and delivered with fixture so that no delays to product delivery shall be allowed.

D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

G. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

H. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is indicated. b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Where located within structural concrete, light fixture housing and any other luminaire components in direct contact with concrete shall be effectively coated and/or covered to prevent chemical reactions with the concrete in accordance with the American Concrete Institute Code.

J. Fixture Finishes:

1. Apply fixture finishes after fabrication in a manner that assures a durable wear-resistant surfacing. Give exposed metal surfaces (brass, bronze, aluminum and others) and finished castings, except chromium -plated or stainless steel parts, an even coat of high -grade meth/acrylate lacquer or transparent epoxy.

2. For corrosive or sal t water environm ents, manufacturer shall provide fixtures with low copper/zinc cast aluminum (AB -47100 aluminum with less than 0.6% copper – classified for corrosive areas) housings to prevent salts from “pitting” aluminum housing.

Manufacturer shall prov ide, in addition to or in lieu of, AB -47100 aluminum, ion added or pre-anodized polyester powder cast finish for “marine grade” applications. Manufacturer shall otherwise provide all stainless steel housing in conjunction with stainless steel hardware.

3. Recessed downlights in corrosive or salt water interior environments shall be equipped with a “natatorium” finish comprised of a zinc -chromated and phosphated process, then powder-coated on the exterior of the housing.

K. Reflectors:

1. Provide aluminum reflecto rs or reflecting cones for downlight style fixtures comprised of #12 aluminum reflector sheet, 0.57 inch (15 gauge) or heavier and free of tool -making indentations, including spinning lines caused by assembly techniques. All reflectors shall be of first-quality, anodized finish :Alzak” with specular or semi-specular finish and color as selected. Provide specular reflectors with no apparent brightness above 45 degrees from Nadir and semi-specular, diffuse reflectors with no apparent brightness above 75 deg rees from Nadir.

L. Mounting hardware and trims:

1. Coordinate as need to suit ceiling conditions.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-8

2. Light fixtures near or in contact with insulation shall comply with code.

3. Maintain a 3” minimum working clearance between non -IC rated light future housings and insulation on all adjacent ductwork, piping, walls and ceilings.

M. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps , LEDs, ballasts and/or drivers. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp, LEDs, ballast and/or driver characteristics:
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp or LED type.
b. LED type, wattage, beam angle (if applicable) for LED luminaires. Indicate maximum allowed wattage.
c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

N. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic - interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate light fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.

O. Emergency lights and exit signs with integral battery back -up shall be connecte d to a separate unswitched conductor bypassing all other controls and contactors. Exit signs shall not be switched. Allow battery to charge for a minimum of 48 hours before light level testing. In order to prevent battery damage, do not turn off power for extended periods of time after the emergency light has been powered.

2.3 EXIT SIGNS
A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self -contained power pack.
a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Rel ay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.
e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. f. Remote Test: Switch in hand -held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, provi ding visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. g. Integral Self-Test: Factory -installed electronic device automatically initiates code - required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

3. Master/Remote Sign Configurations:
a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self -powered exit signs, and provide additional capacity in LED power supply for power connection to remote unit. b. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self -powered exit signs, except omit power supply, battery and test features. Arrange to receive full power requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit as a unified system.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-9

2.4 DRIVERS FOR LED LUMINAIRES
A. Description: Designed for type and quantity of LED diodes of light fixture . Drivers shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without da mage. Driver shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Sound Rating: A.

2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. Shall comply with ANSI C82.77.

3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.

4. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher at full load.

5. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 15, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

6. Driver shall operate with maximum sustained variations of +/ - 10% input voltage and frequency with no damage to driver.

7. Driver output shall be regulated to maximum +/- 5% published load range or requirements of downstream LED fixture.

8. LED Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.

9. LED drivers shall not over -drive LEDs at a current or voltage above LED rated v alues in order to increase LED lumen output.

10. Meets EN610000 for input harmonics.

11. ROHS Compliant.

B. Dimming Drivers:

1. Dimming Range: Visually flicker -free, strobe -free, continuous dimming of source as follows, unless specifically noted otherwise in the Light Fixture Schedule whichever is more stringent:
a. Luminaires: 100 to 10 percent of rated lumens.
b. Lamps: 100 to 20 percent of rated lumens.

2. 0-10V dimming drivers: Compliant with IEC 60929 standard for 4-wire dimming.

3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and LED indicated.

4. Control: Coordinate to ensure that the dimming driver, power supply, controller, dimming module, and/or wallbox dimmer and connecting wiring are compatible.

2.5 LED LAMPS AND LUMINAIRES
A. Comply with ANSI C78.377 for white light LED color range . Unless noted otherwise in the Lig ht Fixture Schedule , LED color quality characteristics shall be 90 CRI minimum and 2700K and 3000KCCT.

B. LED binning specification tolerance to be within 3 MacAdam ellipses of rated values or as indicated in the Light Fixture Schedule, whichever is more stringent . All LEDs used for same fixture type throughout the project to originate from same production bin.

C. Unless indicated otherwise in the Light Fixture Schedule, minimum 70% maintain ed initial-rated lumens at average rated life of as follows:

1. LED lamps: 20,000 hours

2. LED luminaires: 50,0000 hours
D. ROHS compliant
E. Manufacturer of LED chips will be evaluated based on the manufacturer’s product literature and data. At a minimum, LED fixture s or lamps will incorporate Bridgelux, Cree, Nichia, Osram or Xicato LEDs; additional manufacturers may be considered however the Architect or Engineer has the authority to reject other manufacturers for technical or aesthetic reasons if felt necessary or desireable.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-10

2.6 AUXILIARY DEVICES FOR LOW VOLTAGE AND LED FIXTURES
A. Provide remote power supplies, drivers and/or transformers for light fixtures as required for a complete and operational system. Where equipment is not indicated as plenum rated, provide an additional enclosure for the device(s) suitable for the installed environment.

2.7 LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Section s “260548 Seismic Controls for Electrical ” and “ 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems ” for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2 -inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2 -inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces : ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed st ainless steel, 12 gauge
F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

2.8 TRANSFORMERS FOR LOW VOLTAGE FIXTURES
A. Provide transformers to low voltage lamps which are suitable for the electrical characteristics of the supply circuits to which they are to be connected. For remote electronic or magnetic transformers, contractor shall remote transformers so as to reduce voltage drop. For 25 amp low- voltage linear systems, contractor shall not daisy -chain 25A loaded r uns together. Contractor shall provide home-run from end of run to remote transformer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify conditions of equipment and installation prior to beginning work.

B. Verify that equipment is ready for connecting, wiring, and energizing.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Light Fixtures: All work shall be executed to present a neat appearance. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.

C. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

D. Support for Light Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from light fixture corners.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-11

2. Support Clips: Fasten to light fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4 -inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on light fixture.

Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

E. Suspended Light Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. Provide suitable connectors or collars to connect adjoining units to appear as a continuous unit.

4. Decorative pendant mounted light fixtures
a. Provide cord and/or stem lengths to match elevations above finished flo or as indicated on architectural elevations. If architectural elevations do not indicate suspension heights, coordinate with Architect to determine final suspension heights.

Regardless, contractor shall not field cut pendants or order rigid stems without elevation approval from Architect. Pendant suspensions on electrical documents are for reference only.
1) Cord-mounted: Manufacturers shall supply luminaires with flexible, field cutting cords. Contractor shall field cut cords as required. 2) Field-cuttable, ri gid-stem mounted: Manufacturers shall supply luminaires with field cutting rigid stems. Contractor shall field cut stems as required. 3) Factory-cut rigid stem mounted: Contractor shall provide rigid stem dimensions to the manufacturer as required.
b. Junction boxes used to feed light fixtures shall be covered by manufacturer supplied canopy plates.

F. Installation within non-standard ceilings, including, but not limited to, wood and metal ceilings.

1. For recessed downlight light fixtures, specification is based on standard throats to accommodate ceiling thicknesses of ¾” or less. If non -standard ceiling (such as wood, thickened gypboard ceilings and metal plank type) require throats greater than ¾”, modifications to manufacturer’s standard ¾” throat shall be determi ned by Architect and Contractor prior to shop drawing submission.

2. For light fixtures recessed into metal ceilings, rigidly support light fixture to ensure that trim fits flush with ceiling plane.

G. Manufacturer shall supply contractor with a complete list of component elements to comply with design intent for either 20-amp (flexible low voltage track systems or line voltage track) or 50-amp bus bar track systems. Con tractor shall install track systems based on design requirements outlined herein or Light Fixture Schedule.

H. Connect wiring according to Section " 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
I. Through wiring of recessed light fixtures, in suspended ceilings, is not permitted. Connect each light fixture by a whip to a junction box. The whip shall be of sufficient length to allow the light fixture to be relocated within a 6-foot radius.

J. Wall Mounted Light fixtures

1. Unless otherwise noted, conceal all raceways and back boxes for wall mounted light fixtures. Coordinate all wall-mounted light fixtures with interior elevations. Where specific elevations or dimensions are not indicated, verify the correct location with Architect prior to installation. Contractor shall supply structure to support weight of fixture.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-12
K. Contractor shall construct light coves according to architectural details. Contractor shall ensure, unless otherwise directed, that top of fixture lamp is fl ush with top of cove lip. Contractor shall provide blocking as needed under fixture to ensure stated requirement.

L. Auxiliary Devices for low voltage and LED Fixtures

1. Install device within maximum remote distances and with wiring sized per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. In public areas or other areas where remote device visibility is undesireable, install device where concealed from view, well ventilated and accessible. Provide access panels as required.

3. Provide label on device indicating fixture type a nd location/room served along with panelboard circuit number.

4. Properly support remote lighting devices, including transformers, power supplies, and drivers, per Code and manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.3 DIMMING
A. For dimmable light fixtures, provide both control and power wiring between light fixture and control device and between light fixtures. Quantity of low voltage and line voltage wiring and wire type shall be per manufa cturer’s recommendations. At a minimum, provide the following based on control type at either 120V or 277V, unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer:

1. 0-10V – two low voltage conductors and two line voltage conductors plus ground

2. 2-Wire dimming – two line voltage conductors plus ground

3. Proprietary digitally addressable – as required per the manufacturer

4. DMX – two line voltage conductors plus ground and DMX cabling B. Coordinate light fixture and control device dimming types for compatibility.

3.4 COORDINATION
A. Light fixtures shown on the Electrical Drawings represent general arrangements only. Refer to Architectural Drawings for exact locations.

B. Coordinate the installation and location of light fixtures with other work and all other trades before installation to avoid conflicts. Coordina te light fixture locations in mechanical rooms with final installed piping and ductwork layouts.

C. Verify all ceiling systems and coordinate light fixture type and accessories prior to ordering light fixtures. Coordinate and cooperate with ceiling installer in regards to the location and installation of light fixtures.

D. Coordinate final light fuxture locations in walk -in coolers and freezers with refrigeration coils and other trades.

E. Wall-Mounted Light fixtures

1. Coordinate all wall -mounted light fixtures with the architectural features of the building.

Where specific elevations or dimensions are not indicated, verify the correct location with the Architect prior to beginning any work.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Contractor shall adjust all light fixture sockets to match the lamp specified and aim all adjustable light fixtures as directed by the Architect.

B. At the time of substantial completion, aim all track lights, flood lights, spot lights, and other fixtures requiring aiming per the Architect’s direction. Contractor shall make provisions for supplying all scaffolds, lifts, and other tools and equipment as required.

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 51 00-13
C. Where required, focusing shall be done during hours of darkness. Upon notification by contractor that all fixtures are correct as per shop drawings and functioning, that specified lamps have been verified, lighting designer or Architect shall coordinate with contractor as to a mutually agreed upon time to complete focusing. Failure of contractor to notify Architect during substantial completion will result in failure to comply with specifications.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Clean light fixtures of dirt and deb ris upon completion of the installation. Protect installed light fixtures from damage during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Upon completion of the installation of light fixtures, and after building circuits have been energized, energize lightin g branch circuits to demonstrate capability and compliance with the requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.

D. At the time of final acceptance of this project by the Owner, ensure that all lamps are in working order and all light fixtures are fully lamped.

E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner.

3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires t o suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to two visits to Project during other -than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

Some of this work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.

END OF SECTION

SAFE CREDIT UNION CONVENTION CENTER
POPULOUS 17.4465
SEPTEMBER 8, 2021

BALLROOM B HVAC & LIGHTING SYSTEMS

Sacramento City CouncilMarch 7, 2023

Sacramento City Council
March 7, 2023